# SherketyERP

<!-- source: accounting-dashboard.md -->

# Accounting Dashboard

The Accounting Dashboard is the starting point for journal work. A journal card summarizes one
accounting journal and brings together its entry points, so you can open transactions, payments,
invoices, bills, journal entries, reviews, reports, or configuration from the relevant card.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Reach the Accounting hub | [Find and open the dashboard](#find-and-open-the-dashboard) |
| Read a journal's balances, counts, or graph | [Understand the journal cards](#understand-the-journal-cards) |
| Start invoice, bill, payment, transfer, or entry work | [Choose a journal entry point](#choose-a-journal-entry-point) |
| Work out why an action or card is different | [Handle journal and access branches](#handle-journal-and-access-branches) |
| Continue into journal activity | [Accounting journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) |
| Continue into invoices and related records | [Customers, products, and invoices](doc:customers-products-and-invoices) |
| Continue into payments | [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups) |
| Continue into analysis and audit work | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |

## Before you start

The dashboard shows journal cards and actions according to the journal type, journal data, and
your accounting access. A card can therefore offer a different set of actions from another card.

**Prerequisites**

- Your account has access to the Accounting Dashboard.
- You know which work you need to start: bank or cash activity, sales or purchase documents, or
  general journal entries.
- For actions that create or post accounting records, your access includes the required accounting
  group. The available actions also depend on the journal's data, such as its statement source and
  counts.

## Find and open the dashboard

Open the Accounting Dashboard from **Accounting** > **Dashboard** to reach the journal card view.

**Prerequisites**

- You have access to the Accounting area.

**Steps**

1. Open **Accounting**.
2. Select **Dashboard**.
3. Confirm that the page opens the journal cards rather than another page.

**Result:** The dashboard opens the journal card view with the dashboard filter context.

## Understand the journal cards

Each card identifies its journal, shows the amounts and counts relevant to that journal, and offers
the next accounting action.

| On the card | What to read |
|---|---|
| Journal identity | The journal name, company name when shown, and journal alias when applicable |
| Bank or cash information | **Balance**, **Last Statement**, **Cash In**, **Cash Out**, **Payments**, and **Misc. Operations** when their conditions are met |
| Sales or purchase information | Draft, unpaid, late, and to-check counts with their related amounts |
| Journal graph | The dashboard graph for bank, cash, sale, or purchase journals |
| Activities | Select **See all activities** to open the activity list for the journal |
| Sequence warning | **Gaps in the sequence** when the journal has sequence gaps |

The card body follows the journal type. Bank and cash journals use the bank/cash body; sale and
purchase journals use the invoice/bill body; general and situation journals use the journal-entry
body. Rows with no relevant count do not appear.

When a sequence warning appears, hover over **Gaps in the sequence** to read:
`Gaps due to canceled invoices, deleted entries or manual errors in open period.`

## Choose a journal entry point

Use the journal card that matches the work you are about to do. Actions appear in the card's menu
or in its summary area, and the available choices change with the journal type and your access.

| If you need to… | Use the journal card that offers… |
|---|---|
| Review bank statements or cash activity | **Statements** or **Cash Registers** |
| Record a payment or move money between journals | **Payments**, **Customer Payment**, **Vendor Payment**, or **Internal Transfer** |
| Create or review sales documents | **Invoices**, **Credit Notes**, **Invoice**, or **Invoices Analysis** |
| Create or review purchase documents | **Bills**, **Refund**, **Bill**, or **Bills Analysis** |
| Review general journal work | **Journal Entries**, **Entries to Review**, or **Journal Items** |
| Create a general journal record | **Journal Entry** or **New Entry** |
| Post available general-journal entries | **Post All Entries** |
| Change the journal's dashboard setup | **Configuration** |

**Prerequisites**

- You have reached a journal card.
- You know whether the work belongs to a bank, cash, sale, purchase, general, or situation journal.

**Steps**

1. Identify the journal type from the card's available entry points.
2. Open the card menu.
3. Select the entry point that matches your work from the table above.
4. Continue the task on the destination page.

**Result:** The selected journal entry point opens its corresponding accounting work surface.

## Handle journal and access branches

The journal type is the first branch to check because it determines which group of actions belongs
on the card. Statement-source settings, reconciliation counts, dashboard counts, and access groups
then refine what you can see.

| What you see or know | Use this branch |
|---|---|
| The journal is a bank journal | Use bank actions such as Statements and, where available, **Connect** or **New Transaction** |
| The journal is a cash journal | Use **Cash Registers** and the cash **New Transaction** action |
| The journal is a sale journal | Use sales invoice, credit-note, upload, and analysis actions |
| The journal is a purchase journal | Use bill, refund, manual creation, and analysis actions |
| The journal is a general or situation journal | Use journal-entry, review, journal-item, and posting actions |
| The bank statement source is not configured or uses online synchronization | **Connect** can appear for a bank journal |
| The bank statement source allows file import | **New Transaction** can appear for a bank journal |
| A cash journal has items to reconcile | **New Transaction** appears as a link rather than the primary button style |
| A dashboard count is greater than zero | Its related balance or action row appears |
| Your access includes the accounting user, invoice, or manager group | The corresponding new, posting, invoice, payment, transfer, or configuration actions can appear |

**Prerequisites**

- You can see the journal card you need.
- You can read the card's journal type and the action labels currently available.

**Steps**

1. Read the journal type from the card's action choices.
2. Check whether the card offers the action you need.
3. Select the available action that matches the applicable branch.

**Result:** The card presents the entry point allowed by its journal data and your accounting access.

## When the dashboard does not open as expected

Use the page title and visible controls to distinguish the Accounting Dashboard from another page.
The dashboard's empty state also gives a direct next action when no journal cards are available.

| What you see | What to do |
|---|---|
| The route lands on `/web` and the page shows **Menu Style**, **Font Type**, **Preloader Option**, **Theme Colors**, **Brand Color**, **Background Color**, **Sidebar Color**, or **Chatter Position** | You are on the theme customizer. Return to **Accounting** > **Dashboard** and check for the journal cards. |
| The dashboard has no journal cards | Read `This is the accounting dashboard`, then follow `If you have not installed a chart of account, please install one first.` |
| The empty state offers a country-selection link | Select `Browse available countries.` to continue the chart-of-accounts setup route. |
| A sequence-gap link appears on a card | Read `Gaps due to canceled invoices, deleted entries or manual errors in open period.` before choosing the next journal action. |

The buttons **Save** and **Reset To Default** belong to the theme customizer, not to the Accounting
Dashboard. Values such as `5`, `48`, `My Company (San Francisco)`, and `Mitchell Admindemo` are
record values or saved settings rather than dashboard labels.

## Know what to open next

Choose the follow-on page that owns the work opened from the journal card.

| After choosing… | Continue with… |
|---|---|
| **Statements**, **Cash Registers**, **Journal Entries**, or **Journal Items** | [Accounting journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) |
| **Invoices**, **Bills**, **Credit Notes**, **Refund**, **Invoice**, or **Bill** | [Customers, products, and invoices](doc:customers-products-and-invoices) |
| **Payments**, **Customer Payment**, **Vendor Payment**, or **Internal Transfer** | [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups) |
| **Invoices Analysis** or **Bills Analysis** | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |

The dashboard is part of the shared application shell. For shell navigation, use [Understanding the
interface](doc:understanding-the-interface) and [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics).

<!-- source: admin-accounting-dashboard-journals-and-bank-activity.md -->

# Admin accounting dashboard, journals, and bank activity

Use this page to control access to accounting work, import and reconcile bank activity, and set
accounting lock dates.

## Overview

Accounting administration covers the access and conditions around the screens where you manage the
dashboard, journals, and bank activity. Reconciliation matches an imported bank line to a document,
a rule, or a manual counterpart. Lock dates are the accounting boundaries used for management,
tax, and fiscal-year closing. Use the route that matches the work you need to do.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Configure or inspect the accounting dashboard | [Accounting dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard) |
| Configure or inspect journals and bank activity | [Accounting journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) |
| Administer accounts, taxes, or currencies | [Admin accounts, taxes, and currencies](doc:admin-accounts-taxes-and-currencies) |
| Configure payment providers or reconciliation models | [Admin payments, providers, and reconciliation](doc:admin-payments-providers-and-reconciliation) |
| Review journal or audit reporting | [Admin reports and audit work](doc:admin-reports-and-audit-work) |
| Diagnose a general application problem | [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions) |

The accounting menu names the main areas **Dashboard**, **Journals**, **Bank and Cash**, **Import
Bank Statement**, **Bank Reconciliation**, and **Lock Dates**.

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- Sign in with access to the Accounting menus.
- Use an accounting manager account for **Lock Dates**. The menu is restricted to the accounting
  manager group.
- For reconciliation, identify whether the bank line is reconciled and whether its reconciliation
  state is balanced. **Validate** is available only for an unreconciled, balanced line.
- For an import, have the bank file ready and know whether it uses CSV, Excel, CAMT.053, OFX, MT940,
  or QIF format.
- If you are mapping a CSV or Excel file, have the source columns available for mapping. At
  minimum, map the date and amount columns.

> [!NOTE]
> The visible import fields and reconciliation actions are the ones available for the current task.
> The form keeps **Company**, **Currency**, and **Filename** out of view, and the reconciliation
> list and workspace do not offer create or delete actions.

## Find the accounting surface

Accounting surfaces are the lists and forms where you select a journal, import a bank file, match a
bank line, or set closing dates.

**Steps**

1. Open the Accounting menu.
2. Select the destination that matches your task:

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Open the journal dashboard | **Dashboard** |
   | Review journal entries | **Journals** |
   | Open bank or cash activity | **Bank and Cash** |
   | Start a statement import | **Import Bank Statement** |
   | Match imported bank lines | **Bank Reconciliation** |
   | Change accounting closing boundaries | **Lock Dates** |

3. Confirm that the selected list or form opens.

**Result:** The selected accounting surface is open and ready for field review. If the application
returns to the Apps menu, use the troubleshooting table before changing accounting data.

## Understand the accounting surfaces

The import, reconciliation, journal, and lock-date areas each present different groups of fields.
Use the field or tab name that matches the work in front of you.

| Surface | What to look for |
|---|---|
| Import Bank Statement | **Journal**, **Import File**, **File Format**, **Encoding**, **CSV Delimiter**, **Date Format**, **Number Format**, **Has Header Row**, and **Skip Lines**. |
| Column Mapping | **Template**, **Save as Template**, **Template Name**, **File Column**, **Field**, and **Sample Data**. |
| Preview and import results | **Total Transactions**, **Duplicate Count**, **Imported Count**, **Skipped Count**, **Preview Data**, **Validation Errors**, and **Import Log**. |
| Bank Reconciliation list | **Payment Ref**, **Partner**, **Journal**, **Date**, **Amount**, **Is Reconciled**, and **Reconcile State**. |
| Reconciliation workspace | **Bank Line**, **Status**, **Reconcile Residual**, **Statement**, **Proposals**, **Add**, **Match a Document**, **Apply a Rule**, and **Manual Counterpart**. |
| Lock Dates | **Management Closing**, **Period Lock Date**, **Tax Lock Date**, **Account Period Closing**, and **Fiscalyear Lock Date**. |

**Steps**

1. Open the accounting surface for the task.
2. Read the field group or tab that matches the task.
3. If you are saving a template, select **Save as Template** before entering **Template Name**.
4. Use the headers currently visible in a bank-statement list when reviewing its columns.

**Result:** You know which field group, tab, or list row contains the value or action you need.

## Import a bank statement

A bank statement import takes a file through format detection, column mapping, preview, validation,
and import. Use it when bank activity is in a file that must become a bank statement.

**Prerequisites**

- Have the statement file ready.
- Know the journal that receives the imported statement.
- Ensure the source contains date and amount information.

**Steps**

1. Open **Import Bank Statement**.
2. In **1. Upload File**, select the receiving **Journal**.
3. Add the statement in **Import File**.
4. Select **Auto-Detect Format** when the file is present and no column mappings exist.

   `Auto-detection complete! Review the detected values above. If they look correct, click Preview to see your data.`

5. Review **File Format**, **Encoding**, and the detected values in **2. Format Detection**.
6. If the file uses CSV or automatic detection, review **3. Column Mapping**.
7. Map the source date and amount columns in **File Column** and **Field**.

   `Required Columns: At minimum, you must map date and amount columns.`

8. Select **Preview**.
9. Review **Total Transactions**, **Duplicate Count**, **Preview Data**, and **Validation Errors**.

   `All validations passed! Click Import to create the bank statement.`

10. Choose the action that matches your intention:

    | If you need to… | Select |
    |---|---|
    | Create the bank statement after validation | **Import** |
    | Close the form without importing the file | **Cancel** |

11. If you selected **Import**, review **Import Log** and the imported transaction count.

    `Import completed successfully!`

**Result:** The import form shows the import result stage with its import log and transaction count.

## Reconcile bank activity

Bank reconciliation matches an imported bank line to a document, a rule, or a manual counterpart.
Use **Not Reconciled** to find work that still needs a match.

**Prerequisites**

- Open **Bank Reconciliation**.
- Start with a line that is not reconciled.
- For **Validate**, the line must be in the balanced reconciliation state.

**Steps**

1. Select **Not Reconciled** in the list filters.
2. Select a bank line.
3. Select **Load / Refresh** to load or refresh its proposals.
4. Review the **Proposals** tab and the **Reconcile Residual** value.
5. Select one matching route:

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Match an existing document | **Add Match** |
   | Apply a configured reconciliation rule | **Apply Rule** |
   | Enter the counterpart manually | **Add Counterpart** |

6. If the proposals are no longer suitable, select **Reset Proposals**.
7. Select the action that matches the line state:

   | If | Select |
   |---|---|
   | The line is unreconciled and the reconciliation state is balanced | **Validate** |
   | The line is reconciled and you have accounting manager access | **Unreconcile** |

   If you selected **Unreconcile**, the confirmation asks: `Undo this reconciliation and restore the suspense entry?`

8. Cancel the confirmation when you do not intend to undo the reconciliation.

**Result:** The reconciliation workspace shows the selected line, its reconciliation state, and the
available next action.

## Handle roles and accounting branches

The available route depends on the file format, reconciliation state, balance state, and accounting
role. Choose the branch that matches what the screen shows.

| What you see | Use this route |
|---|---|
| **File Format** is `csv` or `auto` | Review CSV-specific settings and **Column Mapping**. |
| The line is not reconciled | Use **Load / Refresh**, **Reset Proposals**, **Add Match**, **Apply Rule**, or **Add Counterpart**. |
| The line is reconciled | Use **Unreconcile** only with accounting manager access. |
| The reconciliation state is not balanced | Continue matching or adjusting the counterpart before selecting **Validate**. |
| A list does not show create or delete actions | Work with the available row and workspace actions. |
| **Save as Template** is selected | Enter **Template Name**. |

**Steps**

1. Read the current **File Format**, **Is Reconciled**, and **Reconcile State** values.
2. Select the control that matches the branch in the table.
3. If **Validate**, **Unreconcile**, or another listed control is absent, check the accounting role
   and record state before continuing.

**Result:** You use the control allowed by the current file format, reconciliation state, balance
state, and accounting role.

## When the accounting surface does not work

Use the message or route that appears to decide whether to correct the file, return to the relevant
Accounting menu, or continue with the next accounting check.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| `No transactions could be read from this file: the required column(s) %s are not mapped. Open the Column Mapping tab and assign them, or rename the file's header row.` | The required source columns are not mapped. | Open **Column Mapping** and assign the date and amount columns, or rename the file's header row. |
| `No transactions could be read from this file. Check the format, encoding and column mapping — every row failed to produce a valid date and amount.` | Every row failed the date-and-amount read. | Check **File Format**, **Encoding**, **Column Mapping**, and the source rows. |
| `Nothing to reconcile — every imported bank line is matched.` | There are no unmatched imported bank lines. | Review the reconciled lines or return to the accounting task that produced the import. |
| `Undo this reconciliation and restore the suspense entry?` | **Unreconcile** is asking for confirmation before undoing the reconciliation. | Cancel the confirmation unless undoing the reconciliation is intended. |
| The route lands on `/web#action=apps_menu` | The accounting destination did not open. | Return to **Accounting** and select the destination again. |
| The page has no visible controls or buttons | There is no accounting surface to work on yet. | Return to **Accounting** and wait for the selected destination to open. |
| **Lock Dates** continues to show a loading indicator | The lock-date form has not finished opening. | Wait for the form before entering a date. |

## Set accounting lock dates

Lock dates define the accounting boundaries shown in the **Management Closing** and **Account Period
Closing** groups. This task requires accounting manager access.

**Prerequisites**

- Sign in with accounting manager access.
- Know the period, tax, or fiscal-year boundary that must be changed.

**Steps**

1. Open **Lock Dates** from Accounting actions.
2. Review **Period Lock Date** in **Management Closing**.
3. Review **Tax Lock Date** in **Management Closing**.
4. Review **Fiscalyear Lock Date** in **Account Period Closing**.
5. Enter the applicable dates.
6. Choose the action that matches your intention:

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Save the applicable accounting boundaries | **Save** |
   | Close the form without saving | **Cancel** |

**Result:** The Lock Dates form shows the applicable accounting boundaries and the **Save** control.

## Know what is next

The accounting dashboard, journal, bank, reconciliation, and lock-date tasks remain separate routes.
Continue to the page that owns the next job:

- For day-to-day dashboard use, open [Accounting dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard).
- For routine journal and bank activity, open [Accounting journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity).
- For accounts, taxes, and currencies, open [Admin accounts, taxes, and currencies](doc:admin-accounts-taxes-and-currencies).
- For payment providers and reconciliation models, open [Admin payments, providers, and reconciliation](doc:admin-payments-providers-and-reconciliation).
- For journal and audit reports, open [Admin reports and audit work](doc:admin-reports-and-audit-work).
- For a general application problem, open [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions).

<!-- source: admin-customers-products-and-invoices.md -->

# Configure customers, products, and invoices

## What this administration page covers

This page brings together the administration surfaces used before customer invoicing work
begins: **Invoices**, **Payments**, **Products**, **Customers**, `Bank Accounts`, and
**e-Faktur**. The six destinations mirror the customer-facing invoicing area.

An administration surface is the destination where you inspect or adjust one class of accounting
record.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Review invoice fields and actions | [Customers, products, and invoices](doc:customers-products-and-invoices), **Invoices** |
| Review payment fields and actions | [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups), **Payments** |
| Review product fields and variants | [Configure products, packages, and delivery](doc:admin-products-packages-and-delivery), **Products** |
| Review customer tax information | **Customers** |
| Review bank-account trust and risk information | `Bank Accounts` |
| Review Indonesian electronic-tax information | [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting), **e-Faktur** |

The invoice view labels columns including **Invoice Date**, **Tax Excluded**, **Total**, and
**Total in Currency**. The payment view labels columns including **Customer** and
**Payment Currency**. The product view labels its columns **Product Name**, **Sales Price**, and
**Unit**. The e-Faktur view labels its calculated column **Total Available**.

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- Know which of the six destinations matches the change you need to make.
- Have access to the accounting destination that contains the record.
- Check the record state before choosing an action. Invoice actions vary by state, and payment
  actions vary by payment state and cancellation state.
- Check whether the work depends on an account group, payment type, product-variant access,
  country, or bank-account validation permission.

**Steps**

1. Choose the destination that matches the record type.
2. Check the fields and conditions listed in [Understand the fields and conditions](#understand-the-fields-and-conditions).
3. Continue to [Configure record actions](#configure-record-actions) when the destination and
   record state match the action you need.

**Result:** You have identified the administration destination and the conditions that govern its
actions. Continue with [Find and open an administration surface](#find-and-open-an-administration-surface).

## Find and open an administration surface

Use the destination that matches the record you need to review.

**Prerequisites**

- Know whether you are looking for an invoice, payment, product, customer, bank account, or
  e-Faktur range.
- Have access to the Accounting menu.

**Steps**

1. Open the Accounting menu.
2. Select one destination from the table.

| If you need to work with… | Select |
|---|---|
| Customer invoices | **Invoices** |
| Customer payments | **Payments** |
| Sellable products | **Products** |
| Customer records | **Customers** |
| Bank-account records | `Bank Accounts` |
| e-Faktur number ranges | **e-Faktur** |

3. Check the landed screen title against the destination you selected.
4. If the expected title is not on screen, follow [Troubleshoot an empty or blocked surface](#troubleshoot-an-empty-or-blocked-surface).

**Result:** You have opened the selected destination, or you have a concrete screen-title failure
to troubleshoot. Continue with [Understand the fields and conditions](#understand-the-fields-and-conditions).

## Understand the fields and conditions

These fields identify the commercial and accounting information named by the six surfaces. The
conditions determine which information and actions apply to the record you are viewing.

| Surface | Fields to check | Conditions to check |
|---|---|---|
| Invoices | **Invoice Date**, **Tax Excluded**, **Total**, **Total in Currency** | Invoice state and account-group access |
| Payments | **Customer**, **Payment Currency**, **Memo**, **Customer Bank Account**, **Vendor Bank Account**, **Company Bank Account** | Payment state, cancellation state, and payment type |
| Products | **Product Name**, **Sales Price**, **Unit** | Product-variant access and variant count |
| Customers | Customer tax information | Country and tax-registration state |
| e-Faktur | **Total Available** | Indonesia context and cancellation state for reset actions |
| Bank Accounts | Bank-account trust information | Bank-account validation permission |

The product Attributes & Variants area is available only for the product-variant access branch.
Product barcode visibility changes with the number of variants. e-Faktur invoice fields depend on
Indonesia context, and customer tax information depends on country and tax-registration state.

Use these conditions before continuing to [Configure record actions](#configure-record-actions).

## Configure record actions

Record actions move an invoice or payment through an accounting operation, open a related view, or
configure product information. Choose the action that matches the record state shown on screen.

**Prerequisites**

- Open the relevant record surface.
- Confirm the current invoice or payment state before selecting an action.

**Steps**

1. Choose the row that matches the record and task.

| Record and task | Select |
|---|---|
| Post an invoice | **Post** |
| Confirm an invoice or payment | **Confirm** |
| Register an invoice payment | **Register Payment** |
| Review an invoice | **Preview** |
| Reverse an invoice entry | **Reverse Entry** |
| Create an invoice credit note | **Credit Note** |
| Cancel an invoice or payment | **Cancel** |
| Return an invoice or payment to draft | **Reset to Draft** or **Reset To Draft** |
| Request payment cancellation | **Request Cancel** |
| Mark a payment as sent | **Mark as Sent** |
| Remove a payment's sent mark | **Unmark as Sent** |
| Print product labels | **Print Labels** |
| Configure product variant values | **Configure** |
| Reset an eligible e-Faktur invoice | **Reset E-Faktur** |

**Result:** You have selected the action that matches the record type and its current state. Continue
with [Handle configuration-dependent branches](#handle-configuration-dependent-branches).

## Handle configuration-dependent branches

Configuration-dependent branches change which fields or actions are available. Check the branch
before changing a record so the action matches the company configuration and record state.

**Prerequisites**

- Know the record type and current state.
- Know whether the record belongs to Indonesia, uses product variants, or uses a bank-account
  validation workflow.

**Steps**

1. Choose the row that matches the record and branch you are handling.

| Record or branch | Check before acting |
|---|---|
| Invoice | Check the state before choosing **Post**, **Confirm**, **Cancel**, **Reset to Draft**, or **Reset E-Faktur**. |
| Payment | Check the payment type and state before choosing **Confirm**, **Cancel**, or **Request Cancel**. |
| Product | Check whether the product-variant branch applies before opening **Configure**. |
| Customer tax information | Check the country and tax-registration state before entering the tax information. |
| Bank account | Check that the bank-account validation permission applies before changing its trust setting. |

**Result:** You have selected the branch that matches the record and the company configuration. Continue
with [Troubleshoot an empty or blocked surface](#troubleshoot-an-empty-or-blocked-surface) if the
expected action or field is absent.

## Troubleshoot an empty or blocked surface

Use this procedure when a destination does not display the expected title, fields, columns, or actions.

**Prerequisites**

- Know the destination you intended to open.
- Have the destination table in [Find and open an administration surface](#find-and-open-an-administration-surface) available.

**Steps**

1. Check the landed address and title after opening the destination.
2. Choose the row that matches the screen you see.

| If you see… | Do this |
|---|---|
| `/web` with no expected title | Check the selected destination and open it again from the Accounting menu. |
| An empty page | Return to the Accounting menu and open the destination again. |
| The Apps menu opens instead of the requested surface and shows **Menu Style**, **Font Type**, **Preloader Option**, **Theme Colors**, **Brand Color**, **Background Color**, **Sidebar Color**, **Chatter Position**, **Save**, and **Reset To Default**. | Return to the Accounting menu and open the selected destination again. |
| `High risk` | Review the bank-account information before using it for an outgoing payment. |
| `Medium risk` | Review the bank-account country and partner country before using it. |
| `To Generate e-Faktur` | Continue in [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting). |
| An absent action | Check invoice state, payment state, payment type, country, product-variant access, account-group access, or validation permission in [Handle configuration-dependent branches](#handle-configuration-dependent-branches). |

3. If the expected page still does not appear, record the failed screen title and continue with
   the page that owns the next task.

**Result:** You have either reopened the intended destination or recorded the exact screen result
needed for the next support step.

## Know what to do next

After you identify the administration surface, continue with the page that owns the next reader
task.

| If you are ready to… | Continue with |
|---|---|
| Create or maintain customer, product, invoice, payment, or bank-account records | [Customers, products, and invoices](doc:customers-products-and-invoices) |
| Record payments and work follow-ups | [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups) |
| Work with electronic invoicing and local reporting | [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting) |
| Configure payment and follow-up administration | [Configure payments and follow-ups](doc:admin-payments-and-follow-ups) |

The next action depends on whether you are maintaining the records themselves or preparing the
administration surface for other users.

**Result:** You know which user-facing or administration page owns the next task.

<!-- source: admin-inventory-overview-and-transfers.md -->

# Configure inventory overview and transfers

## **Inventory** transfers and related records

**Inventory** transfers move goods between warehouses or companies. Returns record goods coming back,
destruction certificates record goods approved for scrapping, batch transfers group operations, and
landed costs add shipment, insurance, or customs costs to product cost.

Use this page when you need to control access to these records, choose the correct route, or explain
why an action is unavailable. For the operational procedures, use [**Inventory** transfers and returns](doc:inventory-transfers-and-returns).

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Open the dashboard and choose an inventory perspective | [Understand the inventory surfaces](#understand-the-inventory-surfaces) |
| Check access and record state before starting | [Before you start](#before-you-start) |
| Find a saved transfer, return, batch, or landed-cost record | [Find and open an inventory record](#find-and-open-an-inventory-record) |
| Progress an inter-company or batch transfer | [Manage transfers and batches](#manage-transfers-and-batches) |
| Process a return or destruction certificate | [Process returns and destruction](#process-returns-and-destruction) |
| **Compute** or validate landed costs | [**Compute** and validate landed costs](#compute-and-validate-landed-costs) |
| Choose a state- or access-dependent route | [Handle access and state-dependent branches](#handle-access-and-state-dependent-branches) |
| Investigate an unavailable action or confirmation | [Troubleshoot an unavailable or unexpected surface](#troubleshoot-an-unavailable-or-unexpected-surface) |
| Continue with warehouse setup | [Configure warehouses and replenishment](doc:admin-warehouses-and-replenishment) |
| Review inventory movement and valuation reports | [Configure inventory reporting](doc:admin-inventory-reporting) |
| Get help with a route or access problem | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) |

## Before you start

Access and record state determine which inventory actions you can use. Prepare the record's source
information before you open it, because the available actions change as the record progresses.

**Prerequisites**

| Check | What to have ready | Why it matters |
|---|---|---|
| Access | **Inventory** access for the dashboard and transfer access for **Inter-Company Transfers** | The menu and transfer record depend on these access groups. |
| Return authority | Returns-manager access for **Process Return** | Processing a received return is restricted to the returns-manager group. |
| **Destruction** authority | Returns-manager access for **Approve & Destroy** | **Destruction** approval is restricted to the returns-manager group. |
| Landed-cost authority | Stock-manager access for **Valuation** | The valuation action requires stock-manager access. |
| Transfer state | `draft` for entering transfer details; `sent` for receiving a two-step transfer; `done` for settlement or return | The transfer header changes with the transfer mode and state. |
| Return state | `draft`, `confirmed`, `received`, or `processed`, depending on the next return action | Each return action is available at a particular stage. |
| **Destruction** state | `draft` before approval and `approved` before completion | The certificate actions follow these stages. |
| Batch state | `draft` or `in_progress`, depending on the next batch action | Batch confirmation, availability checks, and validation use these states. |
| Landed-cost state | `draft` before computation or validation; `done` for valuation | Cost entry is editable before completion and valuation follows completion. |

Check the values and optional fields shown on your screen before proceeding.

With access and state ready, find the inventory destination that matches the work.

## Find and open an inventory record

An inventory list is the starting point for opening a saved transfer, return, destruction
certificate, landed-cost record, or batch transfer. Use the list's search and grouping choices to
narrow the records before opening one.

**Prerequisites**

- You have the access needed for the inventory destination.
- You know whether you are looking for a receipt, return, destruction certificate, inter-company
  transfer, landed cost, or batch transfer.

**Steps**

1. Open **Inventory**.
2. Choose the destination that matches your work.

| If you need to… | Choose |
|---|---|
 | Review incoming goods | **Receipts** |
 | Review a customer return | **All Returns** |
 | Review goods awaiting destruction | **Destruction Certificates** |
 | Review a movement between companies | **Inter-Company Transfers** |
 | Review additional costs assigned to stock | **Landed Costs** |
 | Review grouped operations | **Batch Transfers** |
 | Review operation-type cards | **Inventory Overview** |

3. Use the list's search or filter area to narrow the records.

| Record | Filters and groupings |
|---|---|
| Returns | Use the Status and Date filters; group by Status or Date |
| **Destruction Certificates** | Use the Status and Date filters; group by Status or Date |
| Inter-Company Transfers | Draft, In Transit, Done, or Open المديونية; group by From Company, To Company, or Status |
| Batch Transfers | To Do, My Transfers, Draft, In Progress, or Done; group by Responsible or State |
| **Landed Costs** | Draft, Done, or Date; group by Status or Date |

4. Open the matching record.

**Result:** The selected dashboard, list, or record opens for the next task.

Use the record's fields and panels to choose the procedure that follows.

## Understand the inventory surfaces

The **Inventory Overview** dashboard is a set of role-based views. A transfer, return, destruction
certificate, batch transfer, or landed-cost record is a business record with header information,
detail rows, state controls, and—where applicable—additional panels.

The dashboard perspectives are Warehouse manager, Buyer / planner, Ops director, and
CFO / finance. The manager view includes On-hand value, Items below minimum, Open transfers,
**Operations** today, Forecast, All items below minimum, **Inventory** value by product,
Live activity, and Open operations. The buyer view includes Stockout-risk
SKUs, Avg days of cover, Open POs, Drafts ready, Reorder queue, Vendor
performance · last 90 days, and Open POs · ETA timeline. The operations view includes
Throughput, On-time delivery, Avg WIP age, Work-in-progress, and Open exceptions.
The finance view includes Cash trapped in inventory, Days inventory outstanding, Dead
stock, Slow movers, In transit, **Inventory** aging buckets · what's stuck and for how long,
Cost of goods shipped · monthly, **Valuation** by warehouse, and Top capital tied up.

The record surfaces use these areas:

| Surface | What you work with |
|---|---|
| **Inter-Company Transfers** | **Transfer Mode**, Date, **Warehouse From**, **Warehouse To**, and detail quantities including **Quantity Sent**, **Quantity Received**, **Quantity In Transit**, and **Quantity Returned** |
| Returns | **Products** and **Notes** |
| **Destruction Certificates** | **Items to Destroy** |
| Batch Transfers | Responsible, Operation Type, Company, Scheduled Date, Detailed Operations, Operations, and Transfers |
| **Landed Costs** | **Landed Cost**, Date, **Journal**, **Company**, **Account Move**, **Vendor Bill**, **Additional Costs**, and **Valuation Adjustments** |

In the return product lines, work with **Product**, **Quantity**, Unit of Measure, Lot/Serial
Number, Reason, and Notes. In Items to Destroy, work with **Product**, **Quantity**,
Unit of Measure, Lot/Serial Number, Reason, Unit Value, Total Value, and
Notes. In Additional Costs, work with Product, Name, Account, Split Method,
and **Unit Price**. In **Valuation Adjustments**, work with **Cost Line**, **Product**, **Weight**,
**Volume**, **Quantity**, **Former Cost**, **Final Cost**, and **Additional Landed Cost**.

## Manage transfers and batches

Use the transfer procedure for company-to-company movement and the batch procedure for grouped
operations.

### Create or progress an inter-company transfer

**Prerequisites**

- You have access to **Inter-Company Transfers**.
- The transfer is in the state required by the action you need.
- For a new transfer, you know the transfer mode, date, source warehouse, destination warehouse,
  products, quantities, units of measure, and unit costs.

**Steps**

1. Open or create the inter-company transfer record.
2. Enter **Transfer Mode**, Date, **Warehouse From**, and **Warehouse To**.
3. Add the products and enter **Unit of Measure**, **Quantity**, and Unit Cost in the detail
   lines.
4. Choose the path that matches the transfer mode and state.

| If the transfer is… | Select |
|---|---|
| A draft one-step transfer | **Confirm** |
| A draft two-step transfer | **تسليم — Send** |
| A sent two-step transfer | **استلام — Receive** |
| Done and not settled | **Register Settlement** |
| Done and you need to send goods back | **إرجاع — Return** |
| A draft you need to stop | **Cancel** |

**Result:** The transfer moves to the state associated with the selected path, or the applicable
settlement or return action opens.

### Progress a batch transfer

**Prerequisites**

- The batch is in `draft` or `in_progress`.
- You know whether availability must be checked before validation.

**Steps**

1. Open the batch transfer.
2. Review Responsible, **Operation Type**, **Company**, and **Scheduled Date**.
3. Review the **Transfers** panel and its included operations.
4. Select the action that matches the batch state and availability.

| If you need to… | Select |
|---|---|
| Start a draft batch | **Confirm** |
| Check stock availability | **Check Availability** |
| Complete an available batch | **Validate** |
| **Print** an in-progress or completed batch | **Print** |
| **Print** labels | **Print Labels** |
| Stop an in-progress batch | **Cancel** |
| Open allocation information | **Allocation** |
| Pack the current operation | **Put in Pack** |

**Result:** The batch remains on screen with its new state or opens the selected allocation or
packing surface.

## Process returns and destruction

A return order records goods coming back from a customer. A destruction certificate records the
items approved for destruction after a return requires scrapping.

### Progress a return

**Prerequisites**

- You have the return details, customer, salesperson, return date, warehouse, return location, and
  product lines.
- The return is in the state required by the next action.
- You have returns-manager access for **Process Return**.

**Steps**

1. Open the return order.
2. Complete the return header fields before entering its product lines.
3. In Products, enter **Product**, **Quantity**, Unit of Measure, Lot/Serial Number,
   Reason, and Notes.
4. Select the action that matches the current return state.

| If the return is… | Select |
|---|---|
| A draft return | **Confirm** |
| Confirmed and received at the warehouse | **Receive in Warehouse** |
| Received and ready for authorized processing | **Process Return** |
| Processed | Done |
| A return you need to stop | **Cancel** |
| Cancelled and ready to rework | **Reset to Draft** |

**Result:** The return order stays on screen at the next declared stage. When related records exist,
**Destruction** and **Credit Notes** provide their record destinations.

### Approve a destruction certificate

**Prerequisites**

- You have returns-manager access.
- The certificate is in `draft`.
- You have the certificate date, customer, return order, warehouse, destruction method, and items
  to destroy.

**Steps**

1. Open the destruction certificate.
2. Complete the certificate header fields before reviewing its destruction lines.
3. In Items to Destroy, review **Product**, **Quantity**, Unit of Measure, Lot/Serial
   Number, Reason, Unit Value, Total Value, and Notes.
4. Select **Approve & Destroy**.
5. Read the confirmation message: “Are you sure? This will move all items to scrap and cannot be undone.”
6. **Confirm** the action only when the items and quantities are correct.
7. Choose the next certificate action.

| If you need to… | Select |
|---|---|
| Print a certificate that is not cancelled | **Print Certificate** |
| Complete an approved certificate | **Done** |
| Stop before completion | **Cancel** |

**Result:** The certificate advances from draft to approved when approved, and the certificate print
action remains available while the certificate is not cancelled.

## Compute and validate landed costs

Landed costs add extra costs to stock valuation. Use the record to enter additional costs, compute
the valuation adjustments, and validate the result.

**Prerequisites**

- The landed-cost record is in `draft`.
- You know the date, journal, company, vendor bill, and stock receipts that receive the costs.
- You have the product, account, split method, and unit price for each additional cost.
- You have stock-manager access when you need **Valuation** after completion.

**Steps**

1. Open the landed-cost record.
2. Enter Date, **Journal**, **Company**, **Account Move**, and **Vendor Bill** as applicable.
3. Open **Additional Costs**.
4. Enter **Product**, **Name**, **Account**, **Split Method**, and **Unit Price** for each cost.
5. Review **Valuation Adjustments**, including **Cost Line**, **Product**, **Weight**, **Volume**,
   **Quantity**, **Former Cost**, **Final Cost**, and **Additional Landed Cost**.
6. Select **Compute** while the record is in draft.
7. Choose the next landed-cost action.

| If you need to… | Select |
|---|---|
| Complete the landed-cost record | **Validate** |
| Stop the draft | **Cancel** |
| Open valuation after completion when valuation layers exist and your role has access | **Valuation** |

**Result:** The landed-cost record is computed, validated, cancelled, or opened at its valuation
destination according to the selected action and record state.

## Handle access and state-dependent branches

The same record can show different actions because access, state, transfer mode, counts, and
availability determine the available route.

| If you see… | Use this rule |
|---|---|
| One-step transfer in draft | Use **Confirm**. |
| Two-step transfer in draft | Use **تسليم — Send**. |
| Two-step transfer in sent | Use **استلام — Receive**. |
| Return in received | A returns manager can use **Process Return**. |
| **Destruction** certificate in draft | A returns manager can use **Approve & Destroy**. |
| Batch in progress with availability required | Use **Check Availability** before **Validate**. |
| Landed cost in done with valuation layers | A stock manager can use **Valuation**. |
| Dashboard with more than one allowed perspective | Use the role selector to choose the required perspective. |
| Dashboard with no allowed perspective | The dashboard displays No inventory views are enabled for your role. Contact an administrator. |
| Return with related destruction or credit-note records | Use **Destruction** or **Credit Notes**. |

**Result:** You choose the action that matches the visible record state and your access instead of
using an action from another branch.

## Troubleshoot an unavailable or unexpected surface

Use the visible state, access condition, and exact message to identify the next safe action.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| **Process Return** is unavailable | The return is not in `received`, or the account lacks returns-manager access. | Open the return state and use the action for that state, or ask a returns manager to process it. |
| **Approve & Destroy** is unavailable | The certificate is not in `draft`, or the account lacks returns-manager access. | Check the certificate state and access before trying again. |
| **Valuation** is unavailable | The landed-cost record is not done, valuation layers are absent, or stock-manager access is missing. | Complete the landed-cost path and check the required access. |
| The confirmation message reads `Are you sure? This will move all items to scrap and cannot be undone.` | The approval action moves the certificate items to scrap and cannot be undone. | Check the items and quantities before confirming. |
| The requested inventory route lands on `/web` instead of the requested view | The expected inventory surface did not open. | Return to **Inventory** and choose the destination from the menu. |
| The menu does not open | The inventory menu surface is unavailable at that point. | Check the account's inventory access and open the destination again. |

## Know what happens next

Each completed action leaves the record at a next stage or opens a related operational record.

| After you… | Continue with… |
|---|---|
| Send or receive an inter-company transfer | Review the transfer state, then use **Register Settlement** or **إرجاع — Return** after it is done. |
| Process a return | Open **Destruction** or **Credit Notes** when those related records are available. |
| Approve a destruction certificate | Select **Print Certificate**, then select **Done** after approval. |
| **Validate** landed costs | Open **Valuation** when valuation layers exist and your role permits it. |
| Need replenishment from the dashboard | Use [Configure warehouses and replenishment](doc:admin-warehouses-and-replenishment). |
| Need movement or valuation reporting | Use [Configure inventory reporting](doc:admin-inventory-reporting). |

**Result:** The next record or operational page is clear before you leave the current inventory
surface.

<!-- source: customers-products-and-invoices.md -->

# Customers, products, and invoices

## What you can maintain in Invoicing

Invoicing brings together the destinations where you maintain invoices, payments, products,
customers, and bank accounts.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Maintain invoices | [Find and open a destination](#find-and-open-a-destination) |
| Maintain payments | [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups) |
| Maintain products | [Products, packages, and delivery](doc:products-packages-and-delivery) |
| Maintain customers or bank accounts | [Find and open a destination](#find-and-open-a-destination) |
| Work with portal invoices and exports | [Customer portal invoices and exports](doc:customer-portal-invoices-and-exports) |
| Configure these areas | [Admin: customers, products, and invoices](doc:admin-customers-products-and-invoices) |

## Before you start

Prerequisites

- Know which record destination you need to open: **Invoices**, **Payments**, **Products**,
  **Customers**, or **Bank Accounts**.

## Find and open a destination

Use this procedure when you need to reach an Invoicing destination or open the invoice list.

Steps

1. Select **Accounting**.
2. Select **Customers**.
3. Select **Invoices**.

**Result:** The invoice list opens.

![The invoice list after selecting **Accounting**, **Customers**, and **Invoices**.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/499b401e77a5bd40b937aa4d46707aec.png)

## Understand the invoice list

An invoice list is the work area where you review invoice records and choose how to start invoice
work.

The list has these columns:

| Column | Use it to… |
|---|---|
| **Number** | Identify the invoice. |
| **Customer** | See the customer associated with the invoice. |
| **Invoice Date** | Read the invoice date. |
| **Due Date** | Read the due date. |
| **Activities** | See activities associated with the invoice. |
| **Tax Excluded** | Read the amount before tax. |
| **Total** | Read the total amount. |
| **Total in Currency** | Read the total in the invoice currency. |
| **Payment** | Review the payment state shown for the invoice. |
| **Status** | Review the invoice status. |

Use the column headers to review an invoice. When you are ready to start invoice work, continue to
Create or import an invoice.

## Create or import an invoice

The invoice list offers three ways to start invoice work. Select the choice that matches the work
you need to start.

Steps

1. Choose one option:

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Start a new invoice | **New** |
   | Import invoice information | **Upload** |
   | Follow the invoice setup prompt | **Create Invoice** |

**Result:** You have identified how to start invoice work. Continue to What to do next.

## What to do next

After you open the invoice destination, continue with the job you need to complete.

| Next job | Continue with |
|---|---|
| Follow up on payments | [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups) |
| Maintain products and delivery details | [Products, packages, and delivery](doc:products-packages-and-delivery) |
| Manage portal invoice access or exports | [Customer portal invoices and exports](doc:customer-portal-invoices-and-exports) |
| Configure customer, product, or invoice settings | [Admin: customers, products, and invoices](doc:admin-customers-products-and-invoices) |

<!-- source: faq.md -->

# FAQ

## About the FAQ

An FAQ is a page of answers to the questions people ask before they start the Praxis
Learning programme. Use it to choose a topic, open its question, and read the answer.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Know what the FAQ page covers | [About the FAQ](#about-the-faq) |
| Check what you need before looking for an answer | [Before you start](#before-you-start) |
| Locate a topic | [Find a question](#find-a-question) |
| Understand how the question list is arranged | [Understand the FAQ page](#understand-the-faq-page) |
| Open an answer or choose a follow-up link | [Read an answer](#read-an-answer) |

The page contains questions about who builds Praxis, the AI tutor, the diagnostic, the mock
exam, readiness, existing qualifications, content accuracy, study planning, privacy, and
future bar-exam support.

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

| Before you start | What to have ready |
|---|---|
| Page access | Open the public `/faqs` route. |
| Records | None. |
| Form information | None. |
| Permissions or setup | None is required by the public route. |

## Find a question

Use this procedure when you know the subject of your question and need to locate its FAQ entry.

**Prerequisites**

- You can open the public `/faqs` route.

**Steps**

1. Open `/faqs`.
2. Locate the question list.
3. Choose from the available topics:

   | If you want to know about… | Choose the question beginning… |
   |---|---|
   | The programme's creator | **Who builds Praxis?** |
   | The AI tutor | **Can I actually trust the AI tutor?** |
   | The diagnostic attempt rule | **Why is the diagnostic single-attempt?** |
   | The mock exam | **How realistic is the mock exam?** |
   | Readiness | **What does "readiness" actually mean here?** |
   | Existing qualifications | **I'm exam-qualified — does Praxis save me time?** |
   | Content accuracy | **How do I know the content is correct?** |
   | Study planning | **How long should I plan for?** |
   | Privacy | **Is my data and study activity private?** |
   | Future bar exams | **Will Praxis support other bar exams in future?** |

**Result:** You are on `/faqs` and have identified the question that matches your need.

## Understand the FAQ page

After you identify a topic, the FAQ page presents its question with the answer in one expandable
question entry.

| What you see | What it is for |
|---|---|
| A question heading | Select it to open the answer associated with that question. |
| An answer below the question | Read the response to the selected question. |
| A list of ten questions | Choose the topic that matches your need. |

The page is a reference list. It does not ask you to enter information, work with a grid, or
respond to a validation or confirmation message.

## Read an answer

Use this procedure to select a question, read its answer, and choose a follow-up link.

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened `/faqs`.
- You have identified the question you want to read.

**Steps**

1. Select the question that matches your need, such as **Who builds Praxis?**.
2. Read the answer that opens below the question.
3. Choose the follow-up that matches what you want to do next:

   | If you want to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Return to the FAQ question list | **Visit the FAQ** |
   | Arrange a consultation | **Book a consultation** |

**Result:** You have selected the question whose answer you need to read.

<!-- source: inventory-overview.md -->

# Inventory Overview

## Inventory Dashboard overview

The Inventory Dashboard is the inventory hub for reviewing stock signals and opening an
operational destination, which is the page where you handle the signal. Use it when you need
to move from an inventory signal to replenishment, receipts, backorders, purchasing, or an
operations exception. A perspective is a dashboard view for a particular operational question.
The dashboard offers four perspectives: **Warehouse manager**, **Buyer / planner**,
**Ops director**, and **CFO / finance**.

The classic **Inventory Overview** page is a separate operation-type page. It is not the
dashboard described here.

| If you need to… | Go to |
| --- | --- |
| Find stock alerts, open operations, and current inventory measures | [Understand the perspectives and lists](#understand-the-perspectives-and-lists) |
| Open the inventory hub | [Open the Inventory Dashboard](#open-the-inventory-dashboard) |
| Move from a signal to replenishment, receipts, backorders, purchasing, or an exception | [Choose an operational destination](#choose-an-operational-destination) |
| Work with transfers or returns | [Inventory transfers and returns](doc:inventory-transfers-and-returns) |
| Configure replenishment and warehouse operations | [Warehouses and replenishment](doc:warehouses-and-replenishment) |
| Maintain products, packages, or delivery data | [Products, packages, and delivery](doc:products-packages-and-delivery) |
| Review inventory reports | [Inventory reporting](doc:inventory-reporting) |
| Resolve an unavailable perspective or empty list | [Handle unavailable perspectives and data-dependent lists](#handle-unavailable-perspectives-and-data-dependent-lists) |

Before choosing a destination, review [Before you start](#before-you-start).

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- You have access to the Inventory menu.
- Your account has at least one dashboard perspective available. The available perspectives
  determine which view you can select.
- You have the inventory signal or operational issue you want to review in front of you.

The dashboard is read-only for metrics and uses navigation controls to open operational
destinations. It has no data-entry fields, required markers, or field-level validation.

When you are ready, [open the Inventory Dashboard](#open-the-inventory-dashboard).

## Open the Inventory Dashboard

Use this procedure to start from the Inventory menu. The menu contains a separate
**Inventory Overview** entry and an **Inventory Dashboard** entry; select the dashboard entry
for the hub described on this page.

**Steps**

1. Open the Inventory menu.
2. Choose the destination that matches your need.

   | If you need to… | Select |
   | --- | --- |
   | Review stock signals and continue to an operational destination | **Inventory Dashboard** |
   | Open the classic operation-type cards | **Inventory Overview** |

3. Check that the selected page opens.

**Result:** The Inventory Dashboard opens with the perspectives and operational destinations
available to your account.

## Understand the perspectives and lists

Choose the perspective that matches the decision you need to make.

| Perspective | Use it to review |
| --- | --- |
| **Warehouse manager** | Stock alerts, open operations, stock value, activity, and items below minimum |
| **Buyer / planner** | Stockout risk, days of cover, purchase orders, reorder work, and vendor performance |
| **Ops director** | Throughput, delivery timing, work in progress, and exceptions |
| **CFO / finance** | Cash held in inventory, ageing, cost of goods shipped, and warehouse valuation |

While the dashboard is loading, it displays `…`. When no perspective is available, it
displays `No inventory views are enabled for your role. Contact an administrator.`
When more than one perspective is available, the perspective list and chevron are available.

The warehouse-manager perspective can include stock alerts, a forecast, items below minimum,
inventory value, live activity, and open operations. The buyer/planner perspective can include
a reorder queue, vendor performance, and open purchase-order timing. The operations-director
perspective can include throughput, work in progress, and live exception triage. The finance
perspective can include inventory ageing, cost of goods shipped, warehouse valuation, and
capital tied up in stock.

When no matching data is available, the dashboard can display these messages:

| Area | Message |
| --- | --- |
| Low-stock list | `No items below the minimum.` |
| Activity or chart | `No recent activity.` |
| Vendor performance | `No vendor activity in the last 90 days.` |
| Purchase-order timing | `No open purchase orders.` |
| Work in progress | `No work in progress.` |
| Exception triage | `No open exceptions.` |
| Capital tied up | `No aged stock — all inventory is fresh.` |

The dashboard contains no grid. Work from the headings and readouts visible in the selected
perspective.

Use [Choose an operational destination](#choose-an-operational-destination) when you have
identified the signal you need to handle.

## Choose an operational destination

Use the dashboard when you need to review a signal and then continue in the destination that
handles it. The available links depend on the perspective and the data shown in its lists.

**Steps**

1. Open the perspective switcher.
2. Select one of the available perspectives: **Warehouse manager**, **Buyer / planner**,
   **Ops director**, or **CFO / finance**.
3. Choose the destination that matches the signal or list you are reviewing.

| If you need to… | Select | You arrive at |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Review replenishment work | **Review →** or **Auto-PO all N →** | Replenishment |
| Move to the buyer/planner view from a stock alert | **Reorder →** | Buyer/planner perspective |
| Review receipts awaiting validation | **Review →** in the open-operations area | Receipts awaiting validation |
| Review backorders | **Resolve →** | Backorders |
| Create a transfer | **New transfer** | A new stock transfer form |
| Create a purchase order | **Draft PO** | A new purchase-order form |
| Open an operations exception | **Open →** | The selected exception |

4. If a list shows **+ N more below minimum**, select it to expand the list.
5. If the expanded list shows **Show less**, select it to collapse the list.

**Result:** The selected operational destination opens, or the selected perspective and list
remain visible for the next decision. If the available perspective or list differs from what
you expect, continue with [Handle unavailable perspectives and data-dependent lists](#handle-unavailable-perspectives-and-data-dependent-lists).

## Handle unavailable perspectives and data-dependent lists

Use this procedure when the dashboard shows fewer perspectives or list items than you expect.

**Steps**

1. Open the perspective switcher.
2. Check which perspective names are available.
3. Choose the response that matches what you see.

   | If you see… | Do this |
   | --- | --- |
   | `No inventory views are enabled for your role. Contact an administrator.` | Contact an administrator. |
   | `No items below the minimum.` | Continue with another dashboard area. |
   | `No recent activity.` | Continue with another dashboard area. |
   | `No vendor activity in the last 90 days.` | Continue with another dashboard area. |
   | `No open purchase orders.` | Continue with another dashboard area. |
   | `No work in progress.` | Continue with another dashboard area. |
   | `No open exceptions.` | Continue with another dashboard area. |
   | `No aged stock — all inventory is fresh.` | Continue with another dashboard area. |
   | `This view is under construction — coming in the next phase.` | Choose another available perspective. |

4. If an anomaly, low-stock, or reorder list shows more items than its initial display, select
   **+ N more below minimum**.
5. Select **Show less** when you want to return to the shorter list.

**Result:** You have either selected an available perspective, identified the empty dashboard
area, or expanded the list that contains more items. If the dashboard still does not open,
continue with [When the dashboard does not open](#when-the-dashboard-does-not-open).

## When the dashboard does not open

The screen may open somewhere other than the dashboard. Use the following table to identify
what happened and what to do next.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
| --- | --- | --- |
| A different screen opens instead of the dashboard | A different inventory screen opened | Return to the Inventory menu and select **Inventory Dashboard** |
| The Inventory menu does not open | You cannot choose the dashboard entry | Retry the Inventory menu, then select **Inventory Dashboard** |
| The dashboard controls do not appear after you choose **Inventory Dashboard** | The dashboard did not open | Stop there and do not treat the other screen as the Inventory Dashboard |
| No perspective is available | Your account has no dashboard perspective to select | Contact an administrator |

The dashboard view remains unavailable when the Inventory menu cannot be opened or another
screen appears.

## What to do next

After you choose a destination, continue on the page that owns that operational work:

- Use [Inventory transfers and returns](doc:inventory-transfers-and-returns) for transfers
  and returns.
- Use [Warehouses and replenishment](doc:warehouses-and-replenishment) for replenishment
  and warehouse operations.
- Use [Products, packages, and delivery](doc:products-packages-and-delivery) for product,
  package, and delivery data.
- Use [Inventory reporting](doc:inventory-reporting) for inventory reports.

<!-- source: what-is-sherkety-erp.md -->

# What is Sherkety ERP

## What Sherkety ERP is

The shared shell opens without a concept-page surface.

Start with its identity and business purpose, then choose the information you need next.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| understand the audience for the product | [Who uses Sherkety ERP](doc:who-uses-sherkety-erp) |
| see what the product can do | [What you can do with Sherkety ERP](doc:what-you-can-do-with-sherkety-erp) |
| check what you need before setup | [System requirements](doc:system-requirements) |
| learn the product's interface and navigation | [Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface) |
| get help with a problem | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) |

## Before you continue

Start with the question you need to answer.

Authentication is a separate application task. Use the Login page for authentication
fields, login actions, and login messages.

<!-- source: your-first-day.md -->

# Your first day

Signing in is the entry task for starting work in Sherkety ERP. The application shell is the
starting screen after sign-in; use it to choose the application area that matches your work.

| If you need to… | Go to |
| --- | --- |
| Reach the sign-in form | [Reach the sign-in page](#reach-the-sign-in-page) |
| Enter your details | [Enter your details and submit the form](#enter-your-details-and-submit-the-form) |
| Understand the sign-in result | [Submit the form and handle the result](#submit-the-form-and-handle-the-result) |
| Choose an application area | [Choose where to start work](#choose-where-to-start-work) |
| Understand the shell | [Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface) |
| Open a destination from the product menu | [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) |
| Adjust workspace options | [Personalizing your workspace](doc:personalizing-your-workspace) |

Begin by preparing your sign-in details.

## Before you sign in

Have the email address and password for your account ready. The sign-in form is where you enter
those details. It contains **Email** and **Password**. It can also contain **Database** when more
than one database is available.

| What you use | What to expect |
| --- | --- |
| **Email** | Enter the email address for your account. |
| **Password** | Enter the password for your account. |
| **Database** | Use the database shown when the form offers more than one database. |

Enter a value in **Password**. Your sign-in session can prefill **Email** and **Database**.

With these details ready, continue to [Reach the sign-in page](#reach-the-sign-in-page).

The form requires **Email** and **Password**. When **Database** is shown, it is also required.

## Reach the sign-in page

Use the sign-in route to reach the form before entering your details.

**Prerequisites**

You have the sign-in information described in [Before you sign in](#before-you-sign-in).

**Steps**

1. Open `/web/login`.
2. Confirm that **Email** and **Password** are visible.

![Check that the sign-in form is visible before entering your details.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/f84c0e9880246b251ffaedc9899a0ce7.png)

**Result:** The sign-in form is on screen with **Email** and **Password** available. Continue to
[Enter your details and submit the form](#enter-your-details-and-submit-the-form).

## Enter your details and submit the form

The sign-in form collects your account details and submits them with **Log in**.

**Prerequisites**

You are on the sign-in form.

**Steps**

1. In **Email**, enter the email address for your account.
2. In **Password**, enter the password for your account.
3. If **Database** is shown, select the database you need.
4. Select **Log in**.

The **Select** control opens the database selector when the form offers a database choice.

**Result:** The sign-in request is submitted. A successful request continues to the application
shell. If sign-in fails, an error message appears on the sign-in page. Continue to [Submit the
form and handle the result](#submit-the-form-and-handle-the-result).

## Submit the form and handle the result

After you select **Log in**, read the result to identify the sign-in branch you reached.

**Prerequisites**

You have selected **Log in** on the sign-in form.

**Steps**

1. Read the sign-in result when the request finishes.

| What you see | Next action |
| --- | --- |
| `You are logged in.` | Continue to [Choose where to start work](#choose-where-to-start-work). |
| An error message | Read [When sign-in does not work](#when-sign-in-does-not-work). |

After a successful sign-in, the text `You are logged in.` can appear. Debug mode can also add
**Log in as superuser**. Database management can add **Manage Databases** unless database
management is disabled.

**Result:** You either reach the application shell or have the message needed to correct the
sign-in attempt.

The application shell opens at `/web`.

## Choose where to start work

In the application shell, **Home Menu** can list the following work areas:

| Application labels |
| --- |
| **Discuss**, **Calendar**, **To-do**, **Contacts**, **CRM**, **Sales** |
| **Dashboards**, **Point of Sale**, **Accounting**, **Legal**, **Project**, **Timesheets** |
| **Website**, **Email Marketing**, **Purchase**, **Inventory**, **Manufacturing**, **Maintenance** |
| **Repairs**, **Employees**, **Attendances**, **Recruitment**, **Fleet**, **Time Off** |
| **Expenses**, **Lunch**, **Apps**, **Settings** |

In full-screen mode, the navigation bar is hidden.

**Prerequisites**

You are in the application shell.

**Steps**

1. Open **Home Menu**.
2. Choose the application area that matches the work you need to do.
3. If the area presents sections, choose the section for the destination you need.
4. When the needed section is under **More Menu**, open **More Menu**.
5. Choose the needed section.

The shell can also show **Documentation**, **Support**, **Shortcuts CTRL+K**, **My Profile**,
**My Sherkety Account**, and **Log out**. Choose a destination by the label shown in the shell.

**Result:** The application shell remains available while you choose a work area or section. If a
sign-in message still needs attention, go to [When sign-in does not work](#when-sign-in-does-not-work);
otherwise continue to [Continue from the shell](#continue-from-the-shell).

## When sign-in does not work

Use the message on the sign-in page to decide what to do next.

**Prerequisites**

The sign-in request has finished and a message is visible on the sign-in page.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
| --- | --- | --- |
| `Wrong login/password` | The submitted account details were refused. | Check the details in **Email** and **Password**, then select **Log in** again. |
| `Only employees can access this database. Please contact the administrator.` | The selected database does not allow this access route. | Contact the administrator. |

**Steps**

1. Find the message in the **What you see** column of the table.
2. Follow the matching action in the **What to do** column.

For support routes, go to [Getting help](doc:getting-help).

**Result:** You have the next action for the sign-in message on screen. When sign-in is resolved,
continue to [Continue from the shell](#continue-from-the-shell).

## Continue from the shell

Once the shell is open, continue with the task that matches your work. Use [Understanding the
interface](doc:understanding-the-interface) to learn the shell's areas, [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics)
to open covered destinations, or [Personalizing your workspace](doc:personalizing-your-workspace)
to work with workspace options.

The shell can also present these workspace controls:

| Workspace controls |
| --- |
| **Menu Style**, **Font Type**, **Preloader Option**, **Theme Colors** |
| **Brand Color**, **Background Color**, **Sidebar Color**, **Chatter Position** |
| **Save**, **Reset To Default** |

**Result:** You have a starting point in the shell and a next page for orientation, navigation, or
workspace setup.

<!-- source: accounting-journals-and-bank-activity.md -->

# Accounting journals and bank activity

## Accounting journals and bank activity

Journal items are the individual accounting lines that make up your entries.
Bank-statement import brings transactions into bank activity, where you can
review each line and reconcile it with a journal item, a rule, or a manual
counterpart. Reconciliation is the matching of a bank line to the accounting
entry that explains it. Lock dates restrict editing for periods you have closed.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Import a bank statement | [Import and review a bank statement](#import-and-review-a-bank-statement) |
| Find an existing journal line | [Review journal and bank or cash activity](#review-journal-and-bank-or-cash-activity) |
| Match a bank line | [Reconcile bank lines](#reconcile-bank-lines) |
| Prevent changes before a closing date | [Set lock dates](#set-lock-dates) |
| Start from the wider accounting workspace | [Accounting dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard) |
| Prepare accounts, taxes, or currencies | [Accounts, taxes, and currencies](doc:accounts-taxes-and-currencies) |
| Continue into reporting and audit work | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

| Have this ready | Why it matters |
|---|---|
| A Bank Journal and a Bank Statement File | The import wizard uses the selected bank journal and uploaded file as its starting information. |
| Access for the accounting work you need to perform | Journal Items is guarded by an accounting read-only group, and Lock Dates is guarded by the account manager group. |
| The statement file and its mapping information | **Import** is available only after preview data exists. |
| A bank line with the needed reconciliation state | **Validate** is shown only when the reconciliation state is balanced. |

Collect the file before opening the import wizard. If the file uses columns that
need mapping, have the date and amount columns identified before you begin.

## Find accounting work

Accounting work is grouped under **Accounting**. Journal Items is under
**Accounting > Accounting > Journals**. Import Bank Statement is also under
**Accounting > Accounting > Journals**. Bank and Cash activity is under
**Accounting > Accounting > Bank and Cash**, and Bank Reconciliation is under
**Accounting > Accounting > Bank and Cash > Bank Reconciliation**. Lock Dates is
under **Accounting > Accounting > Actions > Lock Dates**.

**Steps**

1. Open **Accounting**.
2. Choose the destination that matches your task.

   | If you need to… | Choose |
   |---|---|
   | Work with journal lines | **Journal Items** |
   | Upload a statement file | **Import Bank Statement** |
   | Review bank or cash activity | **Bank and Cash** |
   | Match imported bank lines | **Bank Reconciliation** |
   | Set closing restrictions | **Lock Dates** |

**Result:** The selected accounting destination is open for the accounting job.

## Understand the accounting screens

The Journal Items list shows the accounting lines you can inspect.

| Screen area | Reader-facing fields |
|---|---|
| Journal Items list | Date, Journal, Journal Entry, Account, Partner, Journal Item, Product, Currency, Debit, Credit, Tax Grids, Discount Date, Discount Amount, Originator Tax, Due Date, Residual, Residual in Currency, and Analytic Distribution |
| Journal Item form | Information, Amount, Dates, Taxes, Matching, Currency, Product, States, Analytic, Analytic Lines, and Accounting documents |

The Journal Items search offers Journal Item, **Invoice Date**, **Date**, Due
Date, Discount Date, Amount, **Account**, **Journal**, Journal Entry, and
Originator Tax. Its filters include
Unposted, Posted, To Check, Unreconciled, Sales, Purchases, Bank, Cash,
Miscellaneous, Payable, Receivable, P&L Accounts, Date, and Invoice Date. Use
Group By for Journal Entry, Account, Partner, Journal, Date, Invoice Date,
Taxes, or Tax Grid.

The import wizard is arranged in five steps.
They are 1. Upload File, 2. Format Detection, 3. Column Mapping, 4. Preview & Validation,
and 5. Import Log.
Its file choices
include CSV (Comma-Separated Values), CAMT.053 (European XML - ISO 20022),
OFX/QFX (USA/Canada), MT940 (SWIFT), QIF (Quicken), and Auto-Detect. CSV-specific
settings include CSV Delimiter, Date Format, Number Format, Has Header Row, and
Skip Lines. The preview area includes Total Transactions, Duplicates Found,
Validation Errors, Imported Transactions, Skipped Transactions, and Import Log.

Bank Reconciliation has a list with **Date**, **Journal**, **Partner**, and
**Amount**. Its form groups
the bank line and status, then provides Proposals and Add. The Add area
contains Match a Document, Apply a Rule, and Manual Counterpart. Advanced
matching can add Match Information, Invoice Matching, and Bank Account areas.

The reconciliation states are Nothing to Reconcile, In Progress, Ready
to Validate, and Reconciled. Ready to Validate means the proposals
are balanced for validation; **Reconciled** is the completed state.

Lock Dates contains Management Closing with **Journal Entries Lock Date** and
**Tax Lock Date**, and Account Period Closing with **Lock Date for All Users**.

## Import and review a bank statement

A bank-statement import creates bank activity from a file so that you can review
its transactions and continue with reconciliation.

**Prerequisites**

- Have a **Bank Statement File** and a **Bank Journal** ready.
- Identify the date and amount columns if the file needs manual mapping.

**Steps**

1. Open **Import Bank Statement**.
2. Select a **Bank Journal**.
3. Upload the **Bank Statement File**.
4. Select **Auto-Detect Format** when the file format and mapping need to be detected.
5. Review **Detected Format**, **Detected Encoding**, **Detected Delimiter**,
   **Detected Date Format**, and **Detected Number Format**.
6. Select **Preview**.
7. Review **Total Transactions**, **Duplicates Found**, **Preview Data**, and
   **Validation Errors**.
8. Select **Import** after the preview data is available.
9. Review **Created Statement**, **Imported Transactions**, **Skipped Transactions**,
   and **Import Log**.

**Result:** The imported statement and its resulting bank activity are ready for review.

## Review journal and bank or cash activity

Journal and bank or cash activity is where you inspect accounting lines after
entries or statement transactions exist. Use the list headers and search tools
to narrow the lines before opening a record.

**Prerequisites**

- Have a journal line or bank or cash activity to locate.
- Know whether you are looking for a posted, unposted, bank, cash, payable, or
  receivable line.

**Steps**

1. Open **Journal Items** or **Bank and Cash**.
2. Enter a search term in the search field.
3. Apply the filter that describes the line.

   | If you need to find… | Choose |
   |---|---|
   | Draft journal lines | **Unposted** |
   | Posted journal lines | **Posted** |
   | Lines needing matching | **Unreconciled** |
   | Bank journal lines | **Bank** |
   | Cash journal lines | **Cash** |
   | Customer receivable lines | **Receivable** |
   | Supplier payable lines | **Payable** |

4. Open **Group By** and choose the grouping that matches your review.

   | If you want to group by… | Choose |
   |---|---|
   | The journal entry | **Journal Entry** |
   | The account | **Account** |
   | The partner | **Partner** |
   | The journal | **Journal** |
   | The posting date | **Date** |
   | The invoice date | **Invoice Date** |
   | Taxes | **Taxes** |
   | A tax grid | **Tax Grid** |
5. Open the line whose **Journal Entry**, account, partner, date, or amount
   matches your search.

**Result:** The matching journal or bank activity line is open for review.

## Reconcile bank lines

Reconciliation uses a document match, a rule, or a manual counterpart to clear
an imported bank line against the accounting entry that explains it.

**Prerequisites**

- Open an unreconciled bank line.
- Have a matching document, a reconciliation rule, or the account and amount
  for a manual counterpart.
- For **Validate**, the reconciliation state must be **Ready to Validate**.

**Steps**

1. Open **Bank Reconciliation**.
2. Select **Reconcile** on an unreconciled line.
3. Choose one reconciliation route.

   | If you have… | Choose |
   |---|---|
   | A posted journal item to match | Select the item in **Match a Document**, then select **Add Match**. |
   | A saved reconciliation rule | Select the rule in **Apply a Rule**, then select **Apply Rule**. |
   | The account and amount for the other side | Complete **Manual Counterpart**, then select **Add Counterpart**. |
   | Suggested invoices | Review **Invoice Matching**, then select **Apply Invoice Match**. |
   | A partner bank account to connect | Review **Bank Account**, then select **Link Bank Account**. |

4. Select **Load / Refresh** when you need to load or refresh proposals.
5. Select **Reset Proposals** when you need to remove the current proposals.
6. Review the reconciliation status.
7. Select **Validate** when the status is **Ready to Validate**.
8. Select **Unreconcile** when you need to reverse a completed reconciliation.
9. Confirm the reversal when the confirmation asks:
   `Undo this reconciliation and restore the suspense entry?`

**Result:** The line is reconciled after balanced validation, or the existing
reconciliation is reversed after confirmation.

## Set lock dates

Lock dates define the dates before which accounting or tax journal entries are
restricted. Use them when a closing period must no longer be edited.

**Prerequisites**

- Have account manager access to **Lock Dates**.
- Know the dates for journal-entry, tax, and all-user closing.

**Steps**

1. Open **Lock Dates**.
2. Review **Management Closing** and **Account Period Closing**.
3. Enter the **Journal Entries Lock Date**.
4. Enter the **Tax Lock Date**.
5. Enter the **Lock Date for All Users**.
6. Select **Save**.

**Result:** The lock-date form saves the dates entered for the company.

## When accounting work goes wrong

Use the message on screen to choose the corrective action.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| `Error parsing file: %s` | The file could not be parsed. | Review the file format and its mapping, then use **Preview** again. |
| `Please preview the data before importing` | The import has no preview data. | Select **Preview** before selecting **Import**. |
| `No transactions to import` | The import has no transactions to create. | Review the file and its mapped columns. |
| `No transactions could be read from this file: the required column(s) %s are not mapped.\n\nOpen the Column Mapping tab and assign them, or rename the file's header row.` | A required date or amount column is not mapped. | Open **3. Column Mapping** and map the required columns. |
| `No transactions could be read from this file. Check the format, encoding and column mapping — every row failed to produce a valid date and amount.` | Every row failed date and amount validation. | Review the format, encoding, and column mapping. |
| `Auto-detection complete! Review the detected values above. If they look correct, click Preview to see your data.` | Format detection has finished. | Review the detected values and select **Preview**. |
| `All validations passed! Click Import to create the bank statement.` | Preview validation has passed. | Select **Import**. |
| `Import completed successfully!` | The import completed. | Review **Created Statement**, **Imported Transactions**, and **Import Log**. |
| `Only accountants may validate reconciliations.` | The current access does not permit validation. | Ask an accountant to validate the reconciliation. |
| `The reconciliation is not balanced: %(residual).2f remains. Add matching documents or a counterpart before validating.` | The proposals leave a residual amount. | Add a matching document or counterpart, then validate again. |
| `Only accounting managers may undo a reconciliation.` | The current access does not permit undo. | Ask an accounting manager to undo the reconciliation. |
| `Undo this reconciliation and restore the suspense entry?` | The requested action reverses the reconciliation. | Confirm only if restoring the suspense entry is intended. |
| `Nothing to reconcile — every imported bank line is matched.` | All imported bank lines are already matched. | Review the matched activity or open another accounting destination. |
| `You Are Not Allowed To Perform This Operation` | The current access does not permit the lock-date operation. | Ask an account manager to perform it. |

## What to do next

After an import, continue from **Created Statement**, **Imported Transactions**,
**Skipped Transactions**, and **Import Log**. After reconciliation, use the
status to distinguish **In Progress**, **Ready to Validate**, and **Reconciled**.
After setting dates, continue accounting work with the closing restrictions in
place.

Use [Accounting dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard) to return to the wider
accounting workspace, [Accounts, taxes, and currencies](doc:accounts-taxes-and-currencies)
when setup is needed, or [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work)
when the reviewed activity must support a report or audit task.

<!-- source: admin-accounts-taxes-and-currencies.md -->

# Configure accounts, taxes, and currencies

## Overview

Accounting reference data supplies the structures used when accounting records are created and
processed. Use this page to choose the configuration list that matches the work you need to do.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Maintain account codes, account types, taxes, or account tags | **Chart of Accounts**, **Taxes**, or **Account Tags** |
| Maintain journals or group journals | **Journals** or **Journal Groups** |
| Maintain currencies and their rates | **Currencies** |
| Map taxes or accounts for a fiscal situation | **Fiscal Positions** |
| Maintain payment or delivery terms | **Payment Terms** or **Incoterms** |
| Maintain accounting periods | **Fiscal Year** |
| Change accounting configuration | **Settings** |

These surfaces sit under **Accounting** and **Configuration**. Journal activity, payment providers,
and other downstream work continue on their dedicated pages.

## Before you start

You need a signed-in application session before opening an accounting configuration destination.
Access also controls which lists, fields, and pages you can use. The configuration includes branches
for accounting access, multiple companies, multiple currencies, analytic accounting, and system
administration.

**Prerequisites**

| Have ready | Why it matters |
|---|---|
| The company that owns the reference record | Company-specific fields and lists can depend on the selected company. |
| Currency and rate information | Currency records include display, accuracy, and rate areas. |
| Tax type, scope, and distribution information | Tax fields and account areas change with tax type and tax-exigibility choices. |
| Journal type and account information | Journal account requirements change for bank, cash, sales, purchase, and general journals. |
| Fiscal-position country and VAT information | Country, state, and mapping areas depend on the fiscal-position choices. |

## Find accounting reference data

Use the Accounting configuration menu when you need either an existing record or the list from which
you create or select one.

| If you need to open… | Select… |
|---|---|
| Account definitions | **Chart of Accounts** |
| Tax definitions | **Taxes** |
| Journal definitions | **Journals** |
| Currency definitions | **Currencies** |
| Tax and account mappings | **Fiscal Positions** |
| Payment or delivery terms | **Payment Terms** or **Incoterms** |
| Period definitions | **Fiscal Year** |
| Journal or tax groups | **Journal Groups** or **Tax Groups** |
| Account classification helpers | **Account Groups** or **Account Tags** |
| Accounting configuration | **Settings** |

**Steps**

1. Open **Accounting**.
2. Open **Configuration**.
3. Select the destination that matches the record you need.
4. Select an existing row when you need to review or change a saved record.

The requested **Chart of Accounts** list can also be addressed through its list route. If that route
lands on the application launcher instead, do not treat the launcher as the account list.

**Result:** The selected accounting reference list or record form is on screen.

## Understand the reference-data screens

Each reference type has its own record shape. Use this map before editing so you know which kind of
information belongs to the selected destination.

| Surface | What it contains |
|---|---|
| **Chart of Accounts** | Account identity, account type, tax and tag assignments, allowed journals, currency, depreciation state, grouping, reconciliation, and trade classification. The list also provides account columns and search filters. |
| **Taxes** | Tax identity, description, amount type, use and scope, amount, invoice and refund distributions, child taxes, invoice label, tax group, analytic option, company and country settings, pricing options, and tax-exigibility settings. |
| **Journals** | Journal identity and type, company, default and suspense accounts, profit and loss accounts, sequences, code, currency, bank-account details, incoming and outgoing payment-method rows, access controls, aliases, payment communications, and payment follow-up settings. |
| **Payment Terms** | Term identity and company, early-discount choices, discount values, term lines, preview values, notes, and whether the terms appear on the invoice. |
| **Currencies** | Currency identity, full name, active state, symbol, unit and subunit labels, price accuracy, display position, and rate rows. |
| **Fiscal Positions** | Position identity, automatic application, VAT and foreign-VAT choices, country and state selection, tax mappings, account mappings, and notes. |
| **Journal Groups** | Group identity, excluded journals, sequence, and company. |
| **Tax Groups** | Group identity, country, sequence, company, payable account, receivable account, advance-payment account, and preceding subtotal. |
| **Fiscal Year** | Period identity, company, start date, and end date. |
| **Settings** | Open the settings destination to work with the accounting options available to your installation. |
| **Account Groups** and **Account Tags** | Open these destinations from their accounting configuration entries when you need their classification actions. |

Tax distributions, child taxes, journal payment methods, payment-term lines, currency rates,
fiscal-position tax mappings, and fiscal-position account mappings are maintained from their related
parent record rather than as separate top-level tasks.

## Maintain accounting reference records

Use the record type that matches the accounting rule you are maintaining. A tax definition is not a
journal definition, and a currency rate is not a payment term; choosing the wrong list takes you to a
different record shape.

### Maintain a reference record

**Prerequisites**

- You are on the list or form for the intended reference type.
- You have the company and accounting information required by that record type.
- You know whether the record is new or already saved.

**Steps**

1. Select the record type from the Accounting configuration menu.
2. Open the existing record you need to change, or use the list's create route for a new record.
3. Complete the identity and classification information shown for that record type.
4. Complete any embedded rows, such as tax distributions, payment-term lines, payment methods, currency rates, or mappings.
5. Check the conditional areas described in [Handle conditional reference-data branches](#handle-conditional-reference-data-branches).
6. Review the entered values before leaving the form.

The account form includes statistics actions, the fiscal-position form includes a guidance link, and
the journal and partner forms include related actions. The partner warning link is labelled
**Partners**; it belongs to the partner form rather than to the accounting reference-data lists.

**Result:** The selected accounting reference form contains the values and detail rows for the record
you are maintaining.

## Handle conditional reference-data branches

Conditional areas keep a record aligned with the way it is used. Work from the choice you made in the
record instead of expecting every field to appear at once.

| When you choose… | Check for… |
|---|---|
| A tax amount type other than a group tax | The amount area and the tax group requirement. |
| Cash-basis tax exigibility | The cash-basis transition account requirement. |
| A bank or cash journal | The suspense account and payment-method areas. |
| A sales or purchase journal | The default account requirement and related payment settings. |
| Early discount on a payment term | The discount values, computation, and preview areas. |
| Invoice display for a payment term | The invoice preview area. |
| Automatic application or foreign VAT on a fiscal position | The country, VAT, state, and mapping areas. |
| A cash or bank journal | The Incoming Payments and Outgoing Payments pages. |
| A restricted accounting or company feature | The fields and pages allowed by your access level. |

**Prerequisites**

- You know the record type and the business choice that controls the branch.
- You have the account, company, country, or rate information needed by the branch.

**Steps**

1. In the record's type or configuration field, choose the applicable value.
2. Review the fields that appear or become required.
3. Enter the related account, country, company, or rate information.

**Result:** The reference form shows the fields and detail rows for the selected branch.

## When the reference-data screen does not open

If the address for the Chart of Accounts list opens the application launcher and theme customizer,
you are not on the account list. The launcher displayed **Menu Style**, **Font Type**, **Preloader
Option**, **Theme Colors**, **Brand Color**, **Background Color**, **Sidebar Color**, and **Chatter
Position**, with no required marker on those controls. It also displayed **Save** and **Reset To
Default** for launcher customization.

| What you see | What to do |
|---|---|
| The application launcher and theme customizer | Return to **Accounting**, open **Configuration**, and select the intended reference list again. |
| A field appears only after a type or configuration choice | Return to the controlling choice and use the matching branch in [Handle conditional reference-data branches](#handle-conditional-reference-data-branches). |
| A required account area appears for a bank, cash, sales, purchase, or cash-basis choice | Complete the account required by that choice. |
| The requested reference list is still not on screen | Continue with [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions) for shared routing and unavailable-surface problems. |

Do not use a launcher control as a substitute for an accounting record action.

## Know what is next

After the selected reference record is available, continue with the accounting work that uses it.

| Continue with… | Page |
|---|---|
| Journal, bank, reconciliation, or lock-date administration | [Configure accounting dashboard, journals, and bank activity](doc:admin-accounting-dashboard-journals-and-bank-activity) |
| Payment providers or reconciliation models | [Configure payments, providers, and reconciliation](doc:admin-payments-providers-and-reconciliation) |
| Electronic invoicing and local reporting | [Configure electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:admin-electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting) |
| Shared routing or unavailable-surface troubleshooting | [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) or [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions) |

The selected reference record remains the hand-off point for the next accounting task.

<!-- source: admin-payments-and-follow-ups.md -->

# Configure payments and follow-ups

Use this page to configure payment controls, define overdue follow-up actions, process
follow-up work, and troubleshoot the messages and conditions that stop the work.

## Payments and follow-ups

Payments record liquidity movements. Follow-up levels define actions for invoices that pass
their due date, and manual follow-ups help you assign and clear the next action for an overdue
account.

| If you need to… | Go to |
| --- | --- |
| Review or control a payment | [Configure and control payments](#configure-and-control-payments) |
| Define overdue steps and actions | [Configure follow-up levels and actions](#configure-follow-up-levels-and-actions) |
| Review overdue accounts | [Process overdue follow-ups](#process-overdue-follow-ups) |
| Diagnose a blocked action | [Troubleshoot payment and follow-up work](#troubleshoot-payment-and-follow-up-work) |
| Continue with user-facing work | [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups) |
| Configure customers, invoices, and related invoicing surfaces | [Customers, products, and invoices](doc:admin-customers-products-and-invoices) |
| Configure online payment providers or reconciliation | [Payments, providers, and reconciliation](doc:payments-providers-and-reconciliation) |
| Work with broader reports and audit tasks | [Reports and audit work](doc:admin-reports-and-audit-work) |

Before changing a record, review the prerequisites below.

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- Know whether the payment is in draft or posted state.
- Have the follow-up plan and overdue actions that your company uses.
- Know which company the follow-up plan belongs to when working in a multi-company setup.
- Have access to the Accounting payment and follow-up areas.
- Decide whether the action only records or prints information, or whether it sends an email
  or generates a letter.

With these conditions identified, open **Accounting** to find the work.

## Find the payment or follow-up work

Use this procedure when you need to reach one of the payment or follow-up surfaces.

**Prerequisites**

- You have access to Accounting.

**Steps**

1. Open **Accounting**.
2. Select the destination that matches your work.

   | If you need to… | Select |
   | --- | --- |
   | Review payments | **Payments** |
   | Define overdue levels | **Follow-up Levels** |
   | Review overdue accounts | **Do Manual Follow-Ups** |
   | Run the follow-up batch | **Send Letters and Emails** |
   | Review follow-up results | **Follow-ups Analysis** |

**Result:** The selected payment or follow-up surface opens.

Use the next section to identify the areas and actions on that surface.

## Recognize the screens

Use these areas to locate the controls for payment setup, overdue actions, manual assignments,
and follow-up analysis.

### Payment form

The payment form groups payment direction, partner, amount, date, memo, journal, payment
method, bank account, and destination-journal information. The payment actions include:

| Payment area | What it contains |
| --- | --- |
| Payment direction | A radio control for the payment type and a choice between customer and vendor context |
| Amount and date | The payment amount, currency where multi-currency access applies, and payment date |
| Journal and method | The journal and payment method used for the payment |
| Bank account | Customer, vendor, or company bank-account choices under their conditions |
| Internal transfer | A destination journal when the payment is an internal transfer |
| Header actions | **Confirm**, **Reset To Draft**, **Cancel**, **Request Cancel**, **Mark as Sent**, and **Unmark as Sent** |

### Follow-up level and step forms

In a follow-up step, select **Manual Action**, **Send an Email**, or **Send a Letter or Email**.
Selecting an action exposes its related group, such as a responsible person, an email template,
or the letter and email introduction.

### Manual follow-ups and analysis

The manual follow-up surface lists accounts with amounts due and overdue. A partner's Payment
Follow-up area contains the responsible person, next-action date, next action, note, and
unreconciled transaction history. **Follow-ups Analysis** is the analysis destination for
follow-up lines, dates, and balances.

After locating the surface, choose the procedure that matches the work.

## Configure and control payments

Use this procedure to work with a payment according to its state and direction.

**Prerequisites**

- Open a payment from **Payments**.
- Use a draft payment for draft-only changes.

**Steps**

1. In the left group of the payment form, select the radio control below the internal-transfer option.
2. Select the applicable customer or vendor context.
3. Select the journal and payment method for the payment.
4. If the payment is an internal transfer, select its destination journal.
5. Choose the action that matches the payment state.

   | If the payment is… | Select |
   | --- | --- |
   | A draft that is ready to post | **Confirm** |
   | A draft that must be abandoned | **Cancel** |
   | Posted and ready to be marked as sent through the manual payment method | **Mark as Sent** |
   | Posted, manual, and already marked as sent | **Unmark as Sent** |
   | Posted and subject to a cancellation request | **Request Cancel** |
   | Eligible to return to draft under the available account permission | **Reset To Draft** |

6. If the payment method requires a bank account, select the applicable bank account before
   confirming the payment.

**Result:** The payment remains in the state selected by the action, or the payment form
remains available for the next permitted action.

If payment work is complete, continue with follow-up-level setup.

## Configure follow-up levels and actions

Use this procedure to define what happens as an invoice becomes more overdue.

**Prerequisites**

- Open **Follow-up Levels**.
- Know the overdue-day points and the action used at each point.

**Steps**

1. Open the follow-up level you need to configure.
2. Select the action that applies to the step.

   | If the step needs to… | Select |
   | --- | --- |
   | Assign work to a person | **Manual Action** |
   | Send an email | **Send an Email** |
   | Use letter or email introduction text | **Send a Letter or Email** |

3. Complete the group that appears for the selected action.

   | Selected action | Group to complete |
   | --- | --- |
   | **Manual Action** | Manual-action responsible person and note |
   | **Send an Email** | Email template |
   | **Send an Email** or **Send a Letter or Email** | Letter or email introduction |

4. Repeat the action choice for each overdue step in the level.

**Result:** The follow-up level contains the selected actions for each overdue step. When a
customer has more than one overdue invoice, the actions for the most overdue invoice are used.

With the level configured, continue to process overdue follow-ups.

## Process overdue follow-ups

Use this procedure to review overdue accounts and choose the appropriate follow-up action.

**Prerequisites**

- Open **Do Manual Follow-Ups**.
- Have a follow-up level configured for the current company before running the batch.

**Steps**

1. Open an overdue account.
2. Review the Payment Follow-up area.
3. Enter or review the next action and its date.
4. Choose the action that matches the work.

   | If you need to… | Action |
   | --- | --- |
   | Clear a completed next action | Select **⇾ Mark as Done** |
   | Print an overdue-payment report | Select **Print Overdue Payments** |
   | Send an overdue email | Select **Send Overdue Email** |
   | Run the configured follow-up level | Open **Send Letters and Emails**, then select **Send emails and generate letters** |

> **Warning:** **Send Overdue Email** and **Send emails and generate letters** can send or
> generate external communication. Use them only when the follow-up is ready for real
> processing.

**Result:** The selected account action is recorded, printed, or prepared for follow-up
processing. Email and letter actions are external communication; do not select them during a
read-only test.

If an action stops, use the troubleshooting table next.

## Troubleshoot payment and follow-up work

Use the first column to match the message or symptom on screen, then apply the corresponding
action.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
| --- | --- | --- |
| `The selected payment method requires a bank account but none is set on the destination journal.` | The selected payment method requires a bank account for the destination journal. | Choose the applicable bank account, then continue. |
| `Your description is invalid, use the right legend or %% if you want to use the percent character.` | The follow-up description uses an invalid legend or percent character. | Correct the description placeholders or escape a percent character as `%%`. |
| `The partner does not have any accounting entries to print in the overdue report for the current company.` | There are no accounting entries available for the current company’s overdue report. | Review the partner’s accounting entries and current-company selection. |
| `There is no followup plan defined for the current company.` | The current company has no follow-up plan. | Configure a follow-up level before printing or processing follow-ups. |
| `Overdue email sent to %s` | An overdue email activity message is recorded with a recipient value. | Review the partner’s follow-up history. |
| `Printed overdue payments report` | An overdue payment report activity message is recorded. | Review the partner’s follow-up history. |
| `%s email(s) sent` | The follow-up result summary reports sent email messages. | Review the result summary before continuing. |
| `%s email(s) should have been sent, but %s had unknown email address(es)` | Some intended recipients have no known email address. | Review the affected accounts and their email addresses. |
| `%s letter(s) in report` | The result summary reports letters in the report. | Review the generated report. |
| `%s manual action(s) assigned:` | The result summary reports assigned manual actions. | Review the responsible people and next actions. |
| `%s partners have no credits and as such the action is cleared` | Follow-up actions were cleared for partners with no credits. | Review the affected partners before assigning a new action. |
| `Follow-up letter of  will be sent` | A follow-up letter activity message is recorded. | Review the follow-up result before continuing. |
| The requested screen opens the Apps/theme screen instead | The route did not reach the intended payment or follow-up surface. | Return to **Accounting** and select the destination from the navigation table. |
| The wizard shows `Session Expired` | The wizard session ended before the screen could be used. | Sign in again and reopen **Send Letters and Emails**. |

After resolving the problem, return to the procedure that matches the work.

## Know what happens next

After configuring or processing payments and follow-ups, continue according to the work that
remains:

- For customer, invoice, and related invoicing administration, open [Customers, products, and
  invoices](doc:admin-customers-products-and-invoices).
- For online payment providers and reconciliation, open [Payments, providers, and
  reconciliation](doc:payments-providers-and-reconciliation).
- For broader reports and audit work, open [Reports and audit work](doc:admin-reports-and-audit-work).
- For user-facing payment and follow-up procedures, open [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups).
- For cross-feature remedies, open [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions).
- For escalation guidance, open [Getting help](doc:getting-help).

<!-- source: admin-products-packages-and-delivery.md -->

# Configure products, packages, and delivery

## Products, packages, and delivery setup

Product packagings describe how a product is contained and identified. Package types describe the
size and weight limits of a container. Packages are container records that group products so the
whole package can move together, or its products can later move as individual units. Use these
setup records before you work with inventory movements that depend on their packaging or delivery
details.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Reach a setup list | [Find an inventory setup record](#find-an-inventory-setup-record) |
| Prepare access before editing | [Before you start](#before-you-start) |
| Maintain product packaging details | [Configure product packagings](#configure-product-packagings) |
| Set container dimensions and limits | [Define package types](#define-package-types) |
| Review a container and its contents | [Manage packages and contents](#manage-packages-and-contents) |
| Resolve access or navigation problems | [Handle access and setup problems](#handle-access-and-setup-problems) |
| Continue with inventory operations | [Inventory overview](doc:inventory-overview) |
| Continue with administrative inventory work | [Configure inventory overview and transfers](doc:admin-inventory-overview-and-transfers) |
| Configure warehouses and replenishment | [Configure warehouses and replenishment](doc:admin-warehouses-and-replenishment) |
| Find general error guidance | [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) |
| Find common solutions | [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions) |

Start with [Before you start](#before-you-start) to confirm access, then use [Find an inventory
setup record](#find-an-inventory-setup-record) to open the relevant list.

## Before you start

Before you change an inventory setup record, know which list you need and have the required access
group for that surface. Product Packagings, Packages, Package Types, Barcode Nomenclatures, and Zip
Prefix each use access rules. Fields such as Unit of Measure, Company, Owner, and Lot or Serial
Number also depend on the required access group.

| Before you start | Why it matters |
|---|---|
| Access group for Product Packagings | It controls access to **Product Packagings**. |
| Access group for Packages and Package Types | It controls access to **Packages** and **Package Types**. |
| Required access group for an optional field | It determines whether fields such as **Unit of Measure**, **Company**, **Owner**, or **Lot/Serial Number** appear. |
| The packaging or package information you want to maintain | It lets you enter the product, quantity, dimensions, weight, barcode, or contents in the appropriate surface. |

With the required access and information ready, use [Find an inventory setup record](#find-an-inventory-setup-record).

## Find an inventory setup record

Use this procedure to open the list that matches the inventory setup job you need to do.

**Prerequisites**

- You know which setup record you need.
- You have the permission for that surface.

**Steps**

1. Open **Inventory**.
2. Open the menu branch shown in the table, then select the corresponding entry:

   | Menu path | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|---|
   | Inventory → Configuration → Products | Maintain product packaging | Product Packagings |
   | Inventory → Products | Review containers and their contents | Packages |
   | Inventory → Configuration → Delivery | Define container dimensions and limits | Package Types |
   | Inventory → Configuration → Products | Open barcode configuration | Barcode Nomenclatures |
   | Inventory → Configuration → Delivery | Open delivery zip-prefix configuration | Zip Prefix |

**Result:** The selected inventory setup list opens, ready for the matching setup procedure below.

## Configure product packagings

Use a product packaging record to record how many units a packaging holds and how that packaging is
identified.

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened **Product Packagings**.
- You have the required access group for Product Packagings.

**Steps**

1. Review the packaging list. Its columns include the sequence handle, **Product**, **Packaging**,
   **Contained quantity**, **Unit of Measure**, **Barcode**, and **Company**.
2. Open a packaging record to review its form.
3. Review **Packaging** as the packaging name.
4. Review **Product** as the associated product.
5. Review **Contained quantity** as the quantity held by the packaging.
6. Review **Unit of Measure** when your account has the required access group for units.
7. Review **Barcode** as the packaging identifier.
8. Review **Company** when your account has the required access group for company fields.
9. On a saved packaging record, treat **Product** as read-only.

The **Product** field appears on the standard packaging form and is omitted from the alternate form.
The alternate list makes the packaging list editable at the bottom. The **Unit of Measure** and
**Company** fields follow the required access group.

**Result:** The packaging list or form shows the product packaging details available to your
account; continue to [Define package types](#define-package-types) when container limits are next.

## Define package types

Use a package type when packages need consistent physical limits, storage capacity, or an optional
barcode.

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened **Package Types**.
- You have the required access group for Package Types.

**Steps**

1. Review the package type list. Its columns include **Name**, **Height**, **Width**, **Length**,
   **Maximum Weight**, and **Barcode**.
2. Open a package type to review its form.
3. Enter or review the container **Size** using **Length**, **Width**, and **Height**.
4. Enter or review **Base Weight**.
5. Enter or review **Maximum Weight**.
6. Enter or review **Barcode**.
7. Review **Company** when your account has the required access group for company fields.
8. Review storage-category capacity when your account has the required access group for storage categories.
9. In the capacity list, review **Storage Category** and **Quantity** for each capacity row.

The size display uses the length unit shown with the dimensions. Storage-category capacity is
controlled by the required access group, and **Company** is available only with the required access group.

**Result:** The package type form shows the dimensions, weights, barcode, company, and available
storage-category capacity; continue to [Manage packages and contents](#manage-packages-and-contents)
when you need to review a container.

## Manage packages and contents

Use a package record to review grouped products, move the whole package together, or return its
products to individual-unit handling.

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened **Packages**.
- You have a saved package to review before using its form actions.

**Steps**

1. Open a package record.
2. Review **Package Reference** to identify the package.
3. Review **Package Type**, **Company**, **Owner**, and **Location**.
4. Review the **Content** list.
5. Review the content fields that are available to your account:

   | Content detail | What to review |
   |---|---|
   | **Product** | The item included in the package. |
   | **Lot/Serial Number** | The lot or serial identifier. |
   | **Quantity** | The number of units included. |
   | **Unit of Measure** | The unit used for the amount. |
6. Select the action that matches your next task:

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Return the contents to individual-unit handling | **Unpack** |
   | Review transfers connected with the package | **Package Transfers** |

The Packages action opens in kanban, tree, or form mode. When the list is empty, the screen uses
these messages:

`Create a new package`

`Packages are usually created via transfers (during pack operation) and can contain different products.`

`Once created, the whole package can be moved at once, or products can be unpacked and moved as single units again.`

**Result:** The package form shows its reference, available details, contents, and package actions;
continue to [Handle access and setup problems](#handle-access-and-setup-problems) if a list, field,
or response does not appear as expected.

## Handle access and setup problems

Inventory setup surfaces can vary with access and access-controlled fields. Use the table below
to choose the next action when a list, field, or response does not appear as expected.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| **Product Packagings** is unavailable | The menu entry requires its access group. | Ask an administrator for the required access group. |
| **Packages** or **Package Types** is unavailable | The menu entry requires its access group. | Ask an administrator for the required access group. |
| **Barcode Nomenclatures** or **Zip Prefix** is unavailable | The menu entry requires its access group. | Ask an administrator to review access for the relevant menu. |
| A field such as **Unit of Measure**, **Company**, **Owner**, or **Lot/Serial Number** is not visible | The field requires an access group. | Ask an administrator to review the required access group. |
| The main Product Packagings route shows an empty page | No labelled controls, columns, or buttons are visible on the route. | Return to **Inventory** and open the setup list again. |
| The Inventory menu does not open | The menu-opening action timed out. | Use the access and navigation guidance in [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions). |

After you resolve an access or navigation problem, return to [What to do next](#what-to-do-next).

**Result:** You are ready to continue with [What to do next](#what-to-do-next).

## What to do next

After you review or configure these records, continue with the operational task that uses them.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Work in the inventory workspace | [Inventory overview](doc:inventory-overview) |
| Administer inventory operations and transfers | [Configure inventory overview and transfers](doc:admin-inventory-overview-and-transfers) |
| Administer warehouses and replenishment | [Configure warehouses and replenishment](doc:admin-warehouses-and-replenishment) |
| Find general error guidance | [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) |
| Find common access and navigation solutions | [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions) |

<!-- source: general-error-messages.md -->

# General error messages

This page helps you identify the page you reached and match an error type with its message.

| If you need to… | Go to |
| --- | --- |
| Recognize the page you reached | [Recognize the error page](#recognize-the-error-page) |
| Match an error type to its message | [Match an error message](#match-an-error-message) |
| Handle a route that does not reach its test page | [When the error page cannot be reached](#when-the-error-page-cannot-be-reached) |
| Get help with a wider application issue | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) |
| Work through common application problems | [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions) |

## Before you start

Use this page to identify the error type and read the exact message associated with its
route.

Prerequisites

- Have the route name or error class in front of you.
- Use the message table to identify the error type before you continue.

**Result:** You know the route name or error class to use in the message table.

## Recognize the error page

The error page is the page shown when the requested route cannot be found. Use its heading,
message, and error number to recognize the state before choosing what to do next.

The route path is `/test_error_view`. It displayed `Page not found`, followed by
`This page does not exist, but you can create it as you are editor of this site.` and
`Error 404`.

The page displayed **Search** and **Create Page**. The page read `Page not found`.

**Result:** You can identify the page state from the route path, `Page not found`, the
explanatory message, and `Error 404`. Next, use the message table to match the error type.

## Match an error message

An HTTP route returns an HTTP error response. An RPC route raises an error for an RPC request.
Use the error class and route type together when matching a message.

| If you need to identify… | Select the error link in the Error type column | Message |
| --- | --- | --- |
| An HTTP user error | `http UserError (400)` | `This is a user http test` |
| An HTTP validation error | `http ValidationError (400)` | `This is a validation http test` |
| An HTTP missing-record error | `http MissingError (400)` | `This is a missing http test` |
| An HTTP access error | `http AccessError (403)` | `This is an access http test` |
| An HTTP access-denied error | `http AccessDenied (403)` | `This is an access denied http test` |
| An HTTP internal-server error | `http InternalServerError (500)` | No explicit message is attached to this route. |
| An HTTP not-found error | `http NotFound (404)` | The error page displays `Page not found`. |
| An RPC user error | `rpc UserError` | `This is a user rpc test` |
| An RPC validation error | `rpc ValidationError` | `This is a validation rpc test` |
| An RPC missing-record error | `rpc MissingError` | `This is a missing rpc test` |
| An RPC access error | `rpc AccessError` | `This is an access rpc test` |
| An RPC access-denied error | `rpc AccessDenied` | `This is an access denied rpc test` |
| An RPC internal-server error | `rpc InternalServerError` | No explicit message is attached to this route. |

**Result:** You can match each error class with its message in the table. If the page shows
`Page not found`, continue with the route check below.

## When the error page cannot be reached

Use the `http NotFound (404)` row to identify the 404 page message.

1. Select an error link in the Error type column, then use the matching row:

   | If the page displays… | Read… |
   | --- | --- |
   | `Page not found` | The route path and `Error 404` |
   | Another error message | The matching message in the Message column |

**Result:** You can identify the error page from `Page not found` and `Error 404`, or match
another displayed message in the Message column. Continue to What to do next for broader help.

## What to do next

Use [Getting help](doc:getting-help) when you need help with an application issue. Use
[Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions) when you need a broader
troubleshooting path.

The `Website test setting` belongs to website configuration rather than this reference.

**Result:** You have the matching error message and the next help page for the issue.

<!-- source: inventory-transfers-and-returns.md -->

# Inventory transfers and returns

## Inventory transfers and returns

Inventory transfers and returns organize the movement of goods and the work that follows it.
Use this page for receipts, deliveries, internal transfers, manufacturings, batches, waves,
returns, destruction certificates, inter-company transfers, scheduler runs, scrap, and landed
costs. These destinations sit under Inventory operations and adjustments.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Receive goods | [Find the inventory work](#find-the-inventory-work), then choose **Receipts** |
| Send goods or move them internally | [Process inventory movements and transfers](#process-inventory-movements-and-transfers) |
| Work with batches or waves | [Handle batches, returns, and inventory extras](#handle-batches-returns-and-inventory-extras) |
| Process a return or destruction certificate | [Handle batches, returns, and inventory extras](#handle-batches-returns-and-inventory-extras), then choose **All Returns** or **Destruction Certificates** |
| Record an inter-company movement | [Process inventory movements and transfers](#process-inventory-movements-and-transfers), then choose **Inter-Company Transfers** |
| Apply landed costs | [Handle batches, returns, and inventory extras](#handle-batches-returns-and-inventory-extras), then choose **Landed Costs** |
| Orient yourself in Inventory | [Inventory Overview](doc:inventory-overview) |
| Review inventory reports | [Inventory Reporting](doc:inventory-reporting) |

Before opening a destination, continue with Before you start.

## Before you start

The inventory destinations covered here are listed under the Inventory menu. Before you begin,
know which movement or return job you need to perform and which destination names it uses.

Begin with the destination that matches the work you need to do rather than entering information
in an unrelated list.

When you know the work, continue with [Find the inventory work](#find-the-inventory-work).

## Find the inventory work

Use this procedure when you need to reach a movement, return, destruction, inter-company, batch,
or landed-cost list.

**Prerequisites**

- You can sign in to Sherkety ERP.
- You know whether you are looking for a movement, a return, a destruction certificate, an
  inter-company transfer, a batch, a wave, a scheduler run, scrap, or landed costs.

**Steps**

1. Open **Inventory**.
2. Open **Operations** for receipts, deliveries, internal movements, manufacturings, batches,
   waves, returns, and inter-company transfers.
3. Open **Transfers** when the destination is grouped under transfers.
4. Choose the destination that matches your work.

   | If you need to… | Choose |
   |---|---|
   | Work with incoming goods | **Receipts** |
   | Work with grouped movements | **Batch Transfers** |
   | Work with movements between companies | **Inter-Company Transfers** |
   | Work with returns | **All Returns** |
   | Work with destruction records | **Destruction Certificates** |
   | Work with added inventory costs | **Landed Costs** |

**Result:** The destination that matches your inventory work is selected. Review the selected
destination before entering inventory information.

## Understand the available screens

Each inventory work type has its own destination rather than one combined entry screen.

Appearance settings control the application's look. If they open, you are not in an Inventory
destination. The appearance settings include these controls:

| Control | Type |
|---|---|
| **Menu Style** | Select |
| **Font Type** | Select |
| **Preloader Option** | Select |
| **Theme Colors** | Select |
| **Brand Color** | Select |
| **Background Color** | Select |
| **Sidebar Color** | Select |
| **Chatter Position** | Select |

The appearance settings screen does not show inventory grid columns. Treat these settings as
appearance controls, not as fields for a receipt, delivery, transfer, return, destruction certificate,
inter-company transfer, batch, wave, scheduler run, scrap record, or landed cost.

> **Note:** The screen also provides **Save** and **Reset To Default** for its appearance settings.

When the destination is an Inventory list, continue with [Process inventory movements and transfers](#process-inventory-movements-and-transfers) or [Handle batches, returns, and inventory extras](#handle-batches-returns-and-inventory-extras).

## Process inventory movements and transfers

Movement work records goods coming in, going out, between internal locations, through
manufacturing, or between companies. Use the destination that names the movement you need.

### Choose a movement destination

**Prerequisites**

- You know which kind of movement you are starting.

**Steps**

1. Open **Inventory**.
2. Open **Operations**.
3. Choose the matching destination from the table.

   | If you need to… | Choose |
   |---|---|
   | Receive goods | **Receipts** |
   | Deliver goods | **Deliveries** |
   | Move goods internally | **Internal** |
   | Record manufacturing movements | **Manufacturings** |
   | Move goods between companies | **Inter-Company Transfers** |

**Result:** The movement destination matching your work is selected. For grouped movements,
returns, or other inventory operations, continue with [Handle batches, returns, and inventory extras](#handle-batches-returns-and-inventory-extras).

## Handle batches, returns, and inventory extras

Batch and wave work groups movements; returns and destruction handle goods coming back or leaving
stock; scheduler runs, scrap, and landed costs cover additional inventory operations.

### Choose a batch, return, or extra destination

**Prerequisites**

- You know which branch of inventory work you need.

**Steps**

1. Open **Inventory**.
2. Open **Operations** for batches, waves, returns, destruction certificates, and scheduler runs.
3. Choose the matching destination from the table.

   | If you need to… | Choose |
   |---|---|
   | Work with grouped movements | **Batch Transfers** |
   | Work with wave movements | **Wave Transfers** |
   | Process returns | **Returns** or **All Returns** |
   | Record destruction | **Destruction Certificates** |
   | Run inventory scheduling | **Run Scheduler** |
   | Record scrap | **Scrap** |
   | Apply landed costs | **Landed Costs** |

**Result:** The selected batch, return, or inventory-extra destination is open. If a different
screen appears, use [When the screen is not the one you need](#when-the-screen-is-not-the-one-you-need).

## When the screen is not the one you need

Use this procedure when the application opens appearance settings or remains at sign-in instead of
showing an Inventory destination.

**Prerequisites**

- You know which Inventory destination you need.

**Steps**

1. Check the screen heading.
2. Choose the corrective action in this table.

   | If you see… | Do this |
   |---|---|
   | The sign-in form remains after you submit your details | Check your sign-in details and retry. |
   | The application menu opens instead of the requested Inventory list | Open **Inventory**. |
   | appearance settings, **Menu Style**, or **Brand Color** | Return to **Inventory**. |

3. Choose the destination that matches your work.

**Result:** The Inventory destination that matches your work is selected. Continue with [Know what comes next](#know-what-comes-next).

## Know what comes next

Use [Inventory Overview](doc:inventory-overview) when you need the wider Inventory hub. Use
[Products, packages, and delivery](doc:products-packages-and-delivery) for product, lot,
package, and delivery records. Use [Warehouses and replenishment](doc:warehouses-and-replenishment)
for warehouse setup and replenishment work. Use [Inventory Reporting](doc:inventory-reporting)
for reporting after inventory work.

<!-- source: payments-and-follow-ups.md -->

# Payments and follow-ups

Payments record liquidity movements received from or sent to a customer or vendor.
Follow-ups organise actions for customers whose invoices are overdue. Use **Payments** to
record and confirm a payment, and use the Follow-Ups destinations to define collection actions,
review overdue customers, send letters or emails, and analyse follow-up activity.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Record or review a payment | [Record a payment and work overdue follow-ups](#record-a-payment-and-work-overdue-follow-ups) |
| Define overdue-payment actions | [Record a payment and work overdue follow-ups](#record-a-payment-and-work-overdue-follow-ups) |
| Review customers with overdue amounts | [Record a payment and work overdue follow-ups](#record-a-payment-and-work-overdue-follow-ups) |
| Send follow-up letters or emails | [Handle payment and follow-up variations](#handle-payment-and-follow-up-variations) |
| Continue with customer and invoice records | [Customers, products, and invoices](doc:customers-products-and-invoices) |
| Continue with journal and bank activity | [Accounting journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) |
| Review wider accounting reports | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

| Have this ready | Why it matters |
|---|---|
| The customer or vendor connected to the payment | The payment form displays **Customer** for customer payments and **Vendor** for vendor payments. |
| The journal and payment method | **Journal** and **Payment Method** are part of the payment details. |
| The follow-up plan and its actions | The plan supplies the actions used for overdue invoices. |
| Access to the required accounting group | Some payment and follow-up controls are restricted to accounting groups. |
| A draft payment when confirming a payment | **Confirm** appears while the payment is in draft. |
| An overdue amount when working a customer follow-up | **Print Overdue Payments** and **Send Overdue Email** appear when the amount due is greater than zero. |

## Find and open a payment or follow-up destination

Payments and follow-ups are the accounting destinations for recording receipts and payments,
organising overdue-payment work, and reviewing follow-up activity.

1. Open **Accounting**.
2. Choose the destination that matches your task.

   | If you need to… | Choose |
   |---|---|
   | Record customer payments | **Customers** > **Payments** |
   | Review follow-up activity | **Follow-Ups** > **Follow-ups Analysis** |
   | Define follow-up levels | **Follow-up Levels** |
   | Work customers with overdue amounts | **Follow-Ups** > **Do Manual Follow-Ups** |
   | Send follow-up letters and emails | **Follow-Ups** > **Send Letters and Emails** |

**Result:** The selected Accounting destination is the surface for the task you chose.

## Understand the payment and follow-up screens

A follow-up level is a set of actions triggered after an invoice passes its due date; when a
customer has several overdue invoices, the actions for the most overdue invoice are used.

### Payment details

| Field label | Area |
|---|---|
| **Date** | Payment list |
| **Name** | Payment list |
| **Journal** | Payment list and payment form |
| **Payment Method** | Payment list and payment form |
| **Customer** | Payment list and customer payment form |
| **Amount in Currency** | Payment list |
| **Payment Currency** | Payment list |
| **Amount** | Payment list and payment form |
| **Status** | Payment list |
| **Vendor** | Vendor payment form |
| **Date** | Payment form |
| **Memo** | Payment form |
| Bank details | **Customer Bank Account**, **Vendor Bank Account**, **Company Bank Account**, and **Destination Journal** when their conditions apply. |
| Form actions | **Confirm**, **Reset To Draft**, **Cancel**, **Request Cancel**, **Mark as Sent**, **Unmark as Sent**, and **Refund**. |

The payment list is read-only. Its header provides **Confirm**. The payment form uses the
payment state to decide which actions appear: **Confirm** is for draft payments, while the
other actions depend on the payment state, cancellation settings, and payment method.

### Follow-up levels and actions

Use the level's delay and actions to match the response to how severely a customer's invoice is
overdue.

| Area | Fields and controls |
|---|---|
| Level | The level name, **Company**, and **Follow-up Steps**. |
| Step timing | The number of **Days overdue** before the step runs. |
| Manual action | **Manual Action**, **Assign a Responsible**, and **Manual action note**. |
| Email action | **Send an Email** and **Email Template**. |
| Letter or email action | **Send a Letter or Email** and the letter or email introduction. |

The **Manual Action** group appears when **Manual Action** is selected. The **Send an Email**
group appears when **Send an Email** is selected. The **Send a Letter or Email** group appears
when either email or letter sending is selected.

### Manual follow-ups

The manual follow-up list is read-only for creation and deletion. It shows the customer,
next-action information, responsibility, due dates, follow-up level, and amounts due.

| Area | Fields and controls |
|---|---|
| Customer row | **Customer**, **Earliest due date**, **Latest follow-up level**, **Amount overdue**, and **Amount due**. |
| Next action | **Responsible**, the next-action date, and **Next action**. |
| Notes and history | **Payment note** and the transaction history. |
| Actions | **Print Overdue Payments**, **Send Overdue Email**, and **⇾ Mark as Done**. |

### Follow-up analysis and sending

**Follow-ups Analysis** uses **Follow-up Level**, **Latest Follow-up Month**, and **Balance**
for its analysis. **Send Letters and Emails** has a send date and a follow-up level where those
fields are available, plus **Send emails and generate letters** and **Cancel**.

## Record a payment and work overdue follow-ups

### Confirm a draft payment

**Prerequisites**

- You have a draft payment open.
- The customer or vendor, amount, date, journal, payment method, and memo are correct.

**Steps**

1. Review **Customer** or **Vendor**.
2. Review **Amount**.
3. Review **Date**.
4. Review **Memo**.
5. Review **Journal**.
6. Review **Payment Method**.
7. Select **Confirm**.

**Result:** The payment leaves the draft path and the payment form shows the actions available
for its resulting state.

### Maintain a follow-up level

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened **Follow-up Levels**.
- You know the number of overdue days and the action the level must assign.

**Steps**

1. Open a follow-up level.
2. Review the level name.
3. Review **Company** when working in a multi-company setup.
4. Set the follow-up step's **Days overdue** value.
5. Select the action that matches the follow-up situation.

   | Situation | Select |
   |---|---|
   | A person must act | **Manual Action** |
   | The step must send an email | **Send an Email** |
   | The step must prepare a letter or email introduction | **Send a Letter or Email** |

6. Complete the fields that appear for the selected action.

**Result:** The selected follow-up actions and their conditional fields appear in the follow-up
level form.

### Record the next action for an overdue customer

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened **Do Manual Follow-Ups**.
- The customer has an amount due greater than zero.

**Steps**

1. Open the customer row.
2. Review **Earliest due date**, **Latest follow-up level**, **Amount overdue**, and **Amount due**.
3. Select a **Responsible** person.
4. Enter the next-action date.
5. Enter the action in **Next action**.
6. Enter context in **Payment note**.
7. Select **⇾ Mark as Done** after the action is complete.

**Result:** The action is complete.

## Handle payment and follow-up variations

Use the branch that matches the record and the action you need to perform.

| Your situation | What to use |
|---|---|
| The payment is from a customer | Use **Customer** and the customer bank-account conditions. |
| The payment is for a vendor | Use **Vendor** and the vendor bank-account conditions. |
| The payment moves money between journals | Select the internal-transfer option and complete **Destination Journal**. |
| A bank account is required | Complete the applicable bank-account field before confirming. |
| You need to assign a person | Select **Manual Action**, then complete **Assign a Responsible** and **Manual action note**. |
| You need to send an email | Select **Send an Email**, then choose **Email Template**. |
| You need to prepare a letter or email | Select **Send a Letter or Email**, then complete the introduction. |
| The customer's email address is missing | The system displays `Email not sent because of email address of partner not filled in`. |

1. Open **Send Letters and Emails** when the follow-up level actions are ready.
2. Review the follow-up level and date fields shown in the dialog.
3. Select **Send emails and generate letters**.

**Result:** Follow-up emails are sent, letters are generated, and manual actions are set per
customer according to the defined follow-up levels.

## Resolve payment and follow-up errors

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| `Your description is invalid, use the right legend or %% if you want to use the percent character.` | The follow-up description contains an invalid legend or percent character. | Correct the description's legends or use `%%` for a percent character. |
| `The partner does not have any accounting entries to print in the overdue report for the current company.` | The customer has no accounting entries eligible for the overdue report in the current company. | Review the customer's accounting entries and current-company context. |
| `There is no followup plan defined for the current company.` | No follow-up plan exists for the current company. | Define a follow-up level and its actions before printing the overdue report. |
| `The followup plan defined for the current company does not have any followup action.` | The current company's follow-up plan has no follow-up action. | Add a follow-up action to the plan. |
| `Email not sent because of email address of partner not filled in` | The customer's email address is missing. | Complete the customer's email address, then use **Send Overdue Email** again. |
| `Printed overdue payments report` | The overdue payments report was printed. | Continue with the follow-up work for the customer. |

## Out of scope

These messages belong to the **Send Letters and Emails** flow:

| Message | Owning page |
|---|---|
| `Follow-up letter of` | **Send Letters and Emails** |
| `will be sent` | **Send Letters and Emails** |
| `email(s) sent` | **Send Letters and Emails** |
| `letter(s) in report` | **Send Letters and Emails** |

## Know what happens next

After you select **Confirm**, the payment leaves draft state. The form then exposes the actions
that apply to the resulting payment state, including **Reset To Draft**, **Cancel**, **Request
Cancel**, **Mark as Sent**, **Unmark as Sent**, and **Refund** when their conditions apply.

After you select **Send emails and generate letters**, the follow-up process sends
emails, generates letters, and sets manual actions according to the follow-up levels.

Use [Customers, products, and invoices](doc:customers-products-and-invoices) for the customer
and invoice records that supply overdue-payment work. Use [Accounting journals and bank
activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) for the journal and bank continuation.
Use [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) for broader accounting reporting.

<!-- source: understanding-the-interface.md -->

# Understanding the interface

## What the interface is for

The application shell is the starting workspace for reaching the Accounting and Inventory
areas. The **Accounting Dashboard** presents journal entries, while the **Inventory Dashboard**
is an entry surface for Inventory work.

Choose a destination by task:

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Recognize the shell and the two covered entry surfaces | [Recognize the shell and entry screens](#recognize-the-shell-and-entry-screens) |
| Open an Accounting or Inventory destination | [Find an entry surface](#find-an-entry-surface) |
| Use an Inventory action | [Use an Inventory entry action](#use-an-inventory-entry-action) |
| Understand why Inventory areas differ | [Handle role and data branches](#handle-role-and-data-branches) |
| Follow the detailed menu procedure | [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) |
| Work with the Accounting Dashboard in detail | [Accounting Dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard) |
| Work with the Inventory Overview in detail | [Inventory Overview](doc:inventory-overview) |
| Change workspace appearance | [Personalizing your workspace](doc:personalizing-your-workspace) |

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- Have permission to open the **Accounting Dashboard**.
- Know that Inventory can begin with a loading state while its information appears.
- Know that an account with no available Inventory role sees a no-views message instead of a role
  area.
- The **Inventory Dashboard** is prioritized before the classic **Inventory Overview**.

An Inventory role is a work perspective that changes the areas and actions shown on the Inventory
surface. If no Inventory role is available, it shows
`No inventory views are enabled for your role. Contact an administrator.`

## Find an entry surface

The product menu includes **Accounting** and **Inventory**. Choose the area that matches the work
you need to start.

### Open Accounting

**Prerequisites**

- You have permission to open the **Accounting Dashboard**.

**Steps**

1. Select the destination that matches your work.

   | If you need to… | Select in order |
   |---|---|
   | Open the Accounting entry surface | **Accounting**, then **Dashboard** |

The requested Accounting screen did not open when this route was used. The product menu also did
not open for the Accounting menu action, so stop at the screen that remains visible.

**Result:** The Accounting Dashboard is the destination for journal entry work when the screen
opens.

### Open Inventory

**Steps**

1. Select the destination that matches your work.

   | If you need to… | Select in order |
   |---|---|
   | Open the Inventory entry surface | **Inventory**, then **Inventory Dashboard** |

The Inventory menu did not open when this route was used.

**Result:** The Inventory Dashboard is the destination for the Inventory entry surface when the
screen opens.

## Recognize the shell and entry screens

The shell combines product navigation with workspace controls. The Accounting Dashboard presents
journal entries with a journal name and type. The Inventory surface presents a role title and
subtitle, followed by metrics and lists that change with the selected role.

The shell currently shows these workspace controls:

| Control | Type |
|---|---|
| **Menu Style** | Select |
| **Font Type** | Select |
| **Preloader Option** | Select |
| **Theme Colors** | Select |
| **Brand Color** | Select |
| **Background Color** | Select |
| **Sidebar Color** | Select |
| **Chatter Position** | Select |
| **Save** | Button |
| **Reset To Default** | Button |

When these role choices are available, the Inventory surface shows the area for the selected choice:

| Role choice | Main area |
|---|---|
| **Warehouse manager** | Today at a glance, including stock health, transfers, activity, and attention areas. |
| **Buyer / planner** | Reorder queue, vendor performance, and open purchase-order timing. |
| **Ops director** | Flow today, throughput, work-in-progress, and exception triage. |
| **CFO / finance** | Working capital, inventory ageing, and warehouse valuation. |

Inventory empty states use these messages:

| Area | Message |
|---|---|
| Items below minimum | `No items below the minimum.` |
| Activity | `No recent activity.` |
| Vendor activity | `No vendor activity in the last 90 days.` |
| Purchase orders | `No open purchase orders.` |
| Work in progress | `No work in progress.` |
| Exceptions | `No open exceptions.` |
| Aged stock | `No aged stock — all inventory is fresh.` |

## Use an Inventory entry action

These actions take you from the Inventory surface to the next operational area. When you recognize
the area you need, continue with the action procedure.

### Open the next Inventory work area

**Prerequisites**

- The Inventory surface is open.
- The relevant action is visible in the role area you selected.

**Steps**

1. Select the action that matches your next task.

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Start a transfer | **New transfer** |
   | Review replenishment or incoming transfers ready for validation | **Review →** |
   | Move to purchasing work for a stock risk | **Reorder →** |
   | Resolve an open backorder | **Resolve →** |
   | Start a purchase order | **Draft PO** |
   | Open the related picking | **Open →** |

**Result:** The selected action takes you to a new transfer form, replenishment or receipts for
validation, the buyer role, backorders, a purchase-order form, or the related picking.

## Handle role and data branches

### Choose a visible Inventory role

**Prerequisites**

- The Inventory surface is open.
- At least one role choice is visible.

**Steps**

1. Select the visible role choice that matches your work after the Inventory information appears.

   | If you need to work with… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Stock health, transfers, and attention areas | **Warehouse manager** |
   | Reordering, vendors, and purchase-order timing | **Buyer / planner** |
   | Throughput, work-in-progress, and exceptions | **Ops director** |
   | Working capital, ageing, and valuation | **CFO / finance** |

**Result:** The selected role area appears.

| What you see | What appears |
|---|---|
| Loading state | The Inventory area is still loading. |
| No available role choice | `No inventory views are enabled for your role. Contact an administrator.` |
| More than one role choice | A role selector can open. |
| **Warehouse manager** selected | The manager area appears. |
| **Buyer / planner** selected | The buyer area appears. |
| **Ops director** selected | The operations area appears. |
| **CFO / finance** selected | The finance area appears. |

## When the screen does not open

> **Note:** The requested Accounting screen did not open, and the Accounting and Inventory menu
> actions did not open.

### Try the destination again

**Prerequisites**

- The product menu is visible.

**Steps**

1. Select the destination that matches your work.

   | If you need to… | Select in order |
   |---|---|
   | Open Accounting | **Accounting**, then **Dashboard** |
   | Open Inventory | **Inventory**, then **Inventory Dashboard** |

2. If the requested screen still does not open, stop at the screen that remains visible.

**Result:** The requested destination is open when the selection succeeds; otherwise, the requested
screen remains unopened.

Use these recovery actions when the destination does not open:

| What you see | What to do |
|---|---|
| The requested screen does not open | Remain on the screen that is visible and use [Getting help](doc:getting-help). |
| The Accounting menu does not open | Use [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) for the menu procedure. |
| The Inventory menu does not open | Use [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) for the menu procedure. |

## Continue with the task you need

The two surfaces on this page are entry points rather than complete Accounting or Inventory
procedures. Continue with the page that owns the work:

| If you need to… | Continue with… |
|---|---|
| Open covered destinations from the product menu | [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) |
| Understand the Accounting Dashboard and its journal entry points | [Accounting Dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard) |
| Understand the Inventory Overview hub | [Inventory Overview](doc:inventory-overview) |
| Change workspace appearance | [Personalizing your workspace](doc:personalizing-your-workspace) |

**Result:** You know which page owns the next navigation, Accounting, Inventory, or personalization
task.

<!-- source: who-uses-sherkety-erp.md -->

# Who uses Sherkety ERP

Choose **Accounting** or **Inventory** for the work you need to do.

## Who uses Sherkety ERP

Sherkety ERP brings several application areas into one application menu. An application area
groups menus for one kind of work. The covered entries are **Accounting** and **Inventory**.

| If you need to… | Start with |
|---|---|
| Work with customer or vendor records | [**Customers** and **Vendors**](#find-the-right-application-area) |
| Work with journals or accounting management | [**Accounting**](#find-the-right-application-area) |
| Read accounting reports | [**Reporting**](#find-the-right-application-area) |
| Work with inventory operations | [**Operations**](#find-the-right-application-area) |
| Work with inventory products | [**Products**](#find-the-right-application-area) |
| Configure inventory or read inventory reports | [**Configuration** and **Reporting**](#find-the-right-application-area) |

For the wider set of application capabilities, see [What can you do with Sherkety ERP](doc:what-you-can-do-with-sherkety-erp).
For sign-in and first-day preparation, see [Your first day](doc:your-first-day).

## Before you start

You need access to the relevant application area before its menus appear for your work.

**Prerequisites**

| Area | Access that controls its availability |
|---|---|
| **Invoicing** | Accounting read-only or invoicing access |
| **Inventory** | Inventory user or manager access |
| **Accounting** | Accounting read-only or invoicing access |
| **Configuration** under **Inventory** | Inventory manager access |
| **Reporting** under **Inventory** | Inventory manager access |

After you confirm your access, find the application area that matches your task.

## Find the right application area

The application menu is where you choose the application area that matches your immediate task.

**Prerequisites**

- You are on the application-menu screen.

**Steps**

1. Choose the row in the table that matches your task.

   | If your task is about… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Customers, vendors, journals, accounting management, or accounting reports | **Accounting** |
   | Operations, products, inventory configuration, or inventory reports | **Inventory** |

2. Select **Accounting** or **Inventory**.

**Result:** You have selected the application area that matches your work.

After choosing an application area, review what the application menu provides.

Use [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) for the next navigation steps after choosing
an application area.

## Understand what the application menu shows

The application-menu screen is the starting surface for the covered application areas; it is
not a record form or a work list.

> **Note:** The application menu includes areas beyond **Accounting** and **Inventory**.

| What you look for | What this screen shows |
|---|---|
| Application areas | **Accounting** and **Inventory** are listed in the application menu. |
| Fields and grid columns | No fields or grid columns are shown on this screen. |
| Messages | No message text is shown. |
| Dialogs and panels | No dialog content is shown, and no panel or tab is expanded. |
| Buttons and stage changes | No buttons or stage changes are shown. |

The application menu also lists **Contacts**, **Sales**, **Purchase**, **Manufacturing**, and
**Employees**. Those entries sit alongside the **Accounting** and **Inventory** areas.

For the broader shell, see [Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface).

<!-- source: accounts-taxes-and-currencies.md -->

# Accounts, taxes, and currencies

## What accounting reference data is

Accounting reference data is the set of records you maintain before accounting work uses them.
This page covers the lists under **Configuration** for **Payment Terms**, **Incoterms**, **Chart of
Accounts**, **Taxes**, and **Currencies**.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Find or maintain payment schedules | [Maintain payment terms and Incoterms](#maintain-payment-terms-and-incoterms) |
| Find or maintain trade terms | [Maintain payment terms and Incoterms](#maintain-payment-terms-and-incoterms) |
| Locate an accounting reference list | [Find a reference list](#find-a-reference-list) |
| See how conditional areas change | [Handle archived, discount, and access branches](#handle-archived-discount-and-access-branches) |
| Continue with the accounting overview | [Accounting dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard) |
| Continue with journals and bank activity | [Accounting journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) |
| Continue with electronic invoicing | [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting) |
| Continue with reports and audit work | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |
| Continue with payment configuration | [Payments, providers, and reconciliation](doc:payments-providers-and-reconciliation) |

When you know which reference data you need, check the access and setup conditions before opening
the list.

## Before you maintain reference data

**Prerequisites**

- You have access to **Configuration** in Accounting.
- For **Incoterms**, access is restricted to the account manager group.
- If your company uses multiple companies, the payment-term company area is available only to
  users in the multi-company group.

The list you need must be available in the Accounting configuration menu. Keep the accounting
reference information you intend to enter ready before you open a record.

When these conditions are in place, use the configuration route to find the required list.

## Find a reference list

Use this procedure to locate an existing reference record or open the list where you can start a
new one.

**Prerequisites**

- You know which accounting reference list you need.
- You have the access described in [Before you maintain reference data](#before-you-maintain-reference-data).

**Steps**

1. Open **Accounting** and select **Configuration**.
2. Select the list that matches your task.

   | If you need to work with… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | The account structure | **Chart of Accounts** |
   | Tax definitions | **Taxes** |
   | Journals | **Journals** |
   | Currencies | **Currencies** |
   | Fiscal positions | **Fiscal Positions** |
   | Journal groups | **Journal Groups** |
   | Tax groups | **Tax Groups** |
   | Account groups | **Account Groups** |
   | Account tags | **Account Tags** |
   | Fiscal years | **Fiscal Year** |
   | Payment schedules | **Payment Terms** |
   | Trade terms | **Incoterms** |

**Result:** The selected accounting reference list is on screen.

## Understand a reference record

A reference record holds the accounting choices that other accounting work can use. The Payment
Terms form names the areas **Payment Terms**, **Due Terms**, **Preview**, **Example**, and
**Reduced tax:**.

| Area | What you can see on the Payment Terms form |
|---|---|
| Payment Terms | The payment-term name area |
| Due Terms | The due-term lines area |
| Preview | The preview area |
| Example | The example amount and date area |
| Reduced tax: | The reduced-tax choice inside the early-discount area |

The Incoterms list is editable in place and the Incoterms form contains the record's name and code
areas.

Use the list you opened to begin the maintenance procedure below.

## Maintain payment terms and Incoterms

Payment terms describe when amounts are due. Incoterms describe the trade terms maintained for a
transaction. Use the route that matches the reference record you need.

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened the appropriate list from **Configuration**.
- For Incoterms, you have account-manager access.

**Steps**

1. Select one route from the table.

   | If you are maintaining… | Open |
   |---|---|
   | A payment schedule | **Payment Terms** |
   | A trade term | **Incoterms** |

2. Open an existing row to review it.
3. In a payment-term record, review **Payment Terms**, **Due Terms**, **Preview**, **Example**, and
   **Reduced tax:** before leaving the record.
4. In an Incoterms record, review the name and code areas before leaving the record.

**Result:** The selected Payment Terms or Incoterms record is open for review or maintenance.

After opening the record, check the branch conditions that affect what appears.

## Handle archived, discount, and access branches

These branches change which parts of a reference screen you see. Use the branch that matches the
record or access path in front of you.

| What you are checking | What appears |
|---|---|
| The record is archived | An **Archived** ribbon appears, and the **Archived** filter can list inactive records. |
| Early discount is off | The discount percentage, discount days, reduced-tax choice, and discount preview are hidden. |
| Early discount is on | The discount percentage, discount days, reduced-tax choice, and related preview can appear. |
| Display on invoice is off | The preview text is hidden. |
| You are in the multi-company group | The payment-term company area is available. |
| You have account-manager access | **Incoterms** is available from the configuration menu. |

If the expected list or control does not appear, use the troubleshooting table below.

## When a reference screen does not open

Use the symptom that matches what is on screen.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| The accounting route shows no controls, columns, or buttons | The requested list did not provide a usable screen. | Return to **Accounting**, select **Configuration**, and reopen the list. |
| The Incoterms title is not on screen | The requested Incoterms view did not land on the expected screen. | Return to **Configuration** and select **Incoterms** again. |
| The address ends at `/web` instead of the requested model view | The application landed on its web shell rather than the requested list. | Use the Accounting menu to reopen the required list. |
| Your sign-in did not complete. | The sign-in form remains open after submission. | Sign in again, then reopen the required list from **Configuration**. |

## Know what comes next

After you review or maintain accounting reference data, continue with the accounting area that
uses it:

- Open [Accounting dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard) for the accounting overview.
- Open [Accounting journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) for
  journal and bank work.
- Open [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting)
  for electronic-invoicing work.
- Open [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) for reporting and audit work.
- Open [Payments, providers, and reconciliation](doc:payments-providers-and-reconciliation) for
  payment and reconciliation configuration.

<!-- source: common-issues-and-solutions.md -->

# Common issues and solutions

## Common issues and solutions

Common issues span the product areas included in the help and troubleshooting section.

Use the section that matches what you need to do:

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Prepare to investigate an issue | [Before you start](#before-you-start) |
| Identify the relevant application surface | [Find and assess the issue](#find-and-assess-the-issue) |
| Understand why live troubleshooting is blocked | [When live testing is blocked](#when-live-testing-is-blocked) |
| See what information is needed next | [What to do next](#what-to-do-next) |

## Before you start

A product area is the business area where the issue occurs. A screen is the application page where
the issue appears. Have both in front of you before investigating.

Gather these details before investigating:

| Check | What you need |
|---|---|
| Product area | Name of the area |
| Screen | Name of the application page |
| Route | Address or menu destination that opens the screen |
| Message | Exact text displayed when the issue occurs |

Use these details to identify the relevant screen and message.

## Find and assess the issue

Start with the screen that displays the issue. Record the product area, screen, route, and exact
message before choosing a solution. If no message is available, quote this text exactly when asking
for help:

`No page-specific component was resolved, so no message can be assigned to this page's flows.`

## When live testing is blocked

If you cannot reproduce the issue on a specific screen, use the relevant functional page for the
product area where it occurs.

Then collect the details listed in the next section.

## What to do next

Collect the details below before asking for an executable solution.

| Add this information | Use it to |
|---|---|
| Owning screen and route | A precise starting point |
| Screen controls and conditions | An executable action sequence |
| Validation, confirmation, and error messages | A matching troubleshooting entry |
| Runtime result | The outcome of the action |

<!-- source: admin-electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting.md -->

# Configure electronic invoicing and local reporting

## Electronic invoicing and ETA reporting

Egypt ETA electronic invoicing connects invoice preparation, signing, submission, and
status review. ETA E-Invoicing Statistics gives you a reporting view of submitted customer
invoices and refunds.

Use this page according to the job you need to complete:

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| configure integration and submission timing | [Configure ETA integration and submission](#configure-eta-integration-and-submission) |
| prepare the personal signing device | [Prepare invoice signing](#prepare-invoice-signing) |
| submit an invoice and read its status | [Submit invoices and monitor ETA status](#submit-invoices-and-monitor-eta-status) |
| review submitted-invoice totals and groupings | [Review ETA invoice statistics](#review-eta-invoice-statistics) |
| fix a connection, credential, signing, or submission problem | [Troubleshoot ETA setup and submission](#troubleshoot-eta-setup-and-submission) |
| configure the invoice, customer, or product data used before submission | the **Configure customers, products, and invoices** page |
| configure country-specific reports and certificates | the **Configure country statutory reports and certificates** page |
| continue into broader accounting reports and audit work | the **Reports and audit work** page |

**Result:** You know which part of the ETA work to open next.

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

| Have or confirm | Why it matters |
|---|---|
| An Egyptian company | The ETA settings block and invoice actions use the company country. |
| An invoice that is posted and not yet signed | This is the condition for **Sign Invoice**. |
| An Egyptian posted invoice with no Submission ID | This is the condition for **Submit to ETA**. |
| ETA credentials for the selected integration mode | The selected mode determines which credentials the connection and submission use. |
| A personal signing record for the company | Signing checks for a drive associated with you and the company. |
| An ETA Certificate, ETA USB Pin, and Access Token | These are the fields used by the signing setup. |
| The host of the local signing tool | The certificate action and invoice signing action use the configured signing host. |

Permissions also affect what you can do. **Sign Invoice** is restricted to the accounting
manager group, while **Submit to ETA** and **Get ETA Invoice PDF** are restricted to the
accounting invoice group.

**Steps**

1. Confirm that the invoice is posted before you begin signing or submission.
2. Confirm that the invoice is Egyptian before you look for the ETA actions.
3. Enter the company's tax information.
4. Enter the ETA information on the invoice journal.
5. Complete the branch details.
6. Complete the customer details.
7. Set the unit codes on the invoice lines.
8. Set the ETA tax codes on the invoice-line taxes.
9. Set the EGS/GS1 barcode on each product.

**Result:** You have the company, access, invoice state, credentials, certificate information,
and signing setup needed for the ETA procedures.

## Find the ETA administration and reporting surfaces

ETA Configurations is the administration list for company-specific ETA settings. Thumb Drive
is the signing setup list. ETA E-Invoicing Statistics is the reporting surface for customer
invoices and refunds that have a Submission ID.

**Steps**

1. Open **Accounting** and **Configuration**.
2. Open **ETA Configurations** to manage company-specific integration settings.
3. Open **Thumb Drive** under **ETA** to manage signing information.
4. Open **Accounting** and **Reporting**.
5. Open **ETA E-Invoicing Statistics** to review submitted invoices.

The landed screen displayed **Menu Style**, **Font Type**, **Preloader Option**, **Theme Colors**,
**Brand Color**, **Background Color**, **Sidebar Color**, and **Chatter Position**, together with
**Save** and **Reset To Default**. These are workspace controls, not ETA administration controls.

**Result:** The required ETA administration or reporting surface is open, ready for configuration
or reporting.

## Configure ETA integration and submission

ETA configuration controls how the company connects to the Egypt Tax Authority and when an
invoice is submitted. Direct Mode uses the company's ETA credentials. Service Provider Mode
uses service-provider credentials.

**Prerequisites**

- You have access to the ETA configuration for the company.
- You have the credentials for the mode you select.

**Steps**

1. Open **ETA Configurations**.
2. Select the company in **Company**.
3. Choose one integration mode in **ETA Integration Mode**:

   | If you need to… | Choose |
   |---|---|
   | use the company's own ETA credentials | `Direct Mode - Use My Own ETA Credentials` |
   | use service-provider credentials | `Service Provider Mode - Use Sherkety Credentials` |

4. Complete the credentials for the selected mode:

   | Selected mode | Complete |
   |---|---|
   | Direct Mode | **ETA Client ID** and **ETA Secret** |
   | Service Provider Mode | **Service Provider Client ID** and **Service Provider Secret** |

5. Choose one option in **Submission Mode**:

   | If you need to… | Choose |
   |---|---|
   | submit when the invoice is confirmed | `Automatic - Submit to ETA when invoice is confirmed` |
   | choose when to submit after confirmation | `Manual - Submit to ETA manually using button` |

6. Select **In Production Environment** when the company is ready to send invoices to the
   production environment.
7. Enter the threshold in **Invoicing Threshold**.
8. Select **Test ETA Connection** after the credentials are configured.

**Result:** The company's ETA integration mode, credentials, submission timing, production
setting, and invoicing threshold are configured for signing setup.

## Prepare invoice signing

Use the Thumb Drive record for signing setup before sending an invoice to ETA. The certificate
action starts the certificate retrieval path through the configured signing host.

**Prerequisites**

- You have the accounting manager permission required by **Sign Invoice**.
- You have the company's signing information and the local signing tool host.

**Steps**

1. Open **Thumb Drive**.
2. Create or open the record for your company.
3. Complete **ETA USB Pin**.
4. Complete **Access Token**.
5. Select **Get certificate**.
6. Confirm that **ETA Certificate** is available before signing an invoice.

**Result:** The personal Thumb Drive record has the signing information and certificate path
needed by **Sign Invoice**, so you can submit the posted invoice.

## Submit invoices and monitor ETA status

An ETA E-Invoice is the Egyptian invoice record together with its ETA identifiers and submission
status. Use this procedure after the invoice is posted and the required company, journal,
branch, customer, product, unit, tax, and signing information is ready.

**Prerequisites**

- The invoice is Egyptian and posted.
- The invoice has no Submission ID when you select **Submit to ETA**.
- A personal Thumb Drive and certificate are ready when you select **Sign Invoice**.

**Steps**

1. Open the posted invoice.
2. Select **Sign Invoice** when the invoice is Egyptian, posted, and unsigned.
3. Select **Submit to ETA** when the invoice is Egyptian, posted, and has no Submission ID.
4. Open the **ETA E-Invoice** tab.
5. Read **Document UUID** and **Submission ID** in that tab.
6. Read the invoice ribbon for its ETA status:

   | If the invoice shows… | The status is |
   |---|---|
   | `Not Submitted to ETA` | `Not Submitted` |
   | `Submitted to ETA` | `Submitted` |
   | `Valid ETA Invoice` | `Valid` |
   | the invoice is marked invalid by ETA | `Invalid` |

7. Select **Get ETA Invoice PDF** when the invoice EDI state is `sent`.

**Result:** The invoice has its ETA identifiers and status available in the **ETA E-Invoice**
tab, and the ETA PDF action is available when the invoice EDI state is `sent` for reporting.

## Review ETA invoice statistics

ETA E-Invoicing Statistics is a reporting surface for customer invoices and refunds with a
Submission ID. It opens with pivot, graph, and tree views and provides filters and groupings for
the submitted invoice population.

**Prerequisites**

- Submitted customer invoices or refunds are available for the selected company.

**Steps**

1. Open **ETA E-Invoicing Statistics**.
2. Read the available invoice columns: `Invoice Number`, **Invoice Date**, **Customer**,
   `ETA UUID`, `Submission ID`, **Total**, **Status**, and `Company`.
3. Filter by `Invoice Number`, **Customer**, `ETA UUID`, or `Submission ID` when you need
   to locate a particular invoice.
4. Select one reporting filter:

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | show records submitted to ETA | **Submitted to ETA** |
   | show records with an ETA identifier | **With ETA UUID** |
   | limit the date range to the current month | **This Month** |
   | limit the date range to the current year | **This Year** |

5. Select `Group By` and choose **Customer**, **Invoice Date**, **Status**, or `Company`.
6. Switch among the pivot, graph, and tree views when you need a different presentation of the
   same reporting population.

**Result:** The ETA statistics show the submitted invoice population with the selected filter,
grouping, and view; use the next section when a message requires corrective action.

## Troubleshoot ETA setup and submission

Use the exact message on screen to choose the corrective path. The messages below cover ETA
connection, credentials, invoice data, certificate setup, signing, and submission.

| Message | What to do |
|---|---|
| `Please configure your ETA credentials before testing the connection.` | Complete the credentials for the selected integration mode, then select **Test ETA Connection** again. |
| `ETA EDI format not found. Please ensure the module is properly installed.` | Ask your administrator to check the ETA EDI installation. |
| `Connection Successful!` | Continue with invoice preparation or submission. |
| `Successfully connected to Egypt Tax Authority API. Your credentials are valid.` | Continue with invoice preparation or submission. |
| `Connection failed.` | Check the connection details and the error text that follows the message. |
| `Connection timeout. Please check your internet connection and try again.` | Check the internet connection and try again. |
| `Cannot connect to ETA server. Please check your internet connection.` | Check the internet connection and try again. |
| `An error occurred: %s` | Read the inserted error text and correct the indicated problem. |
| `No eligible invoices to submit. Invoices must be: Posted; Egyptian invoices (country code EG); Not already submitted to ETA; Customer invoices or credit notes` | Post an Egyptian customer invoice or credit note that has not already been submitted. |
| `Please only sign invoices from one company at a time` | Select invoices belonging to one company before selecting **Sign Invoice**. |
| `Please setup a personal drive for company %s` | Open **Thumb Drive** and set up your personal drive for the company. |
| `Please setup the certificate on the thumb drive menu` | Open **Thumb Drive** and obtain the certificate before signing. |
| `%d invoice(s) successfully submitted to ETA.` | Continue by reading the invoice ETA identifiers and status. |
| `%d invoice(s) skipped (already submitted or locked).` | Review the skipped invoices and their Submission IDs or locks. |
| `%d invoice(s) failed to submit.` | Review the error details shown with the submission result. |
| `This invoice has been marked as invalid by the ETA. Please check the ETA website for more information` | Check the ETA website for the invoice's validation details. |
| `This invoice has been sent to the ETA, but we are still awaiting validation` | Wait for ETA validation before treating the invoice as valid. |
| `Document Cancelled` | Treat the ETA document as cancelled. |
| `an Unknown error has occured` | Review the invoice and ETA response details before retrying. |
| `Direct Mode is selected but ETA credentials are not configured. Please configure your ETA Client ID and Secret in Settings > Accounting > ETA E-Invoicing Settings.` | Configure **ETA Client ID** and **ETA Secret** in the ETA settings. |
| `Service Provider Mode is selected but Sherkety's credentials are not configured. Please contact your system administrator to configure the service provider credentials.` | Contact the system administrator to configure the service-provider credentials. |
| `The company's Tax Registration Number (VAT/TaxRIN) is not configured.` | Configure the company's Tax Registration Number. |
| `Invoice date (%s) cannot be in the future. Please use today's date or earlier.` | Correct the invoice date to today or an earlier date. |
| `Invoice date (%s) is too old. ETA only accepts invoices from the last 2 years.` | Correct the invoice date to a date within the last two years. |
| `You cannot issue an invoice to a partner with the same VAT number as the branch.` | Correct the partner or branch VAT information. |
| `Please configure the token domain from the system parameters` | Configure the token domain in system parameters. |
| `Please configure the API domain from the system parameters` | Configure the API domain in system parameters. |
| `Please set the all the ETA information on the invoice's journal` | Complete the ETA information on the invoice journal. |
| `Please add all the required fields in the branch details` | Complete the required branch details. |
| `Please add all the required fields in the customer details` | Complete the required customer details. |
| `Please make sure the invoice lines UoM codes are all set up correctly` | Correct the unit-of-measure codes on the invoice lines. |
| `Please make sure the invoice lines taxes all have the correct ETA tax code` | Correct the ETA tax codes on the invoice-line taxes. |
| `Please make sure the EGS/GS1 Barcode is set correctly on all products` | Correct the EGS/GS1 barcode on each product. |
| `An error occured in created the ETA invoice, please retry signing` | Retry signing after checking the invoice data. |
| `Please make sure the invoice is signed` | Select **Sign Invoice** before submitting. |
| `Please define the host of sign tool.` | Define the host of the local signing tool. |

The ETA JSON attachment and signing flag are not part of the visible **ETA E-Invoice** tab.
The certificate and access-token columns are not part of the visible **Thumb Drive** list.
The statistics tree is for reading and does not create or edit records.

The administration route can land on the theme customizer instead of the requested settings
screen. When that happens, use **Accounting**, **Configuration**, and the relevant ETA entry
to reach the intended surface.

**Result:** You have a corrective action for the message or route you encountered.

## What to do next

After configuration, continue with the invoice and product data maintained on the **Configure
customers, products, and invoices** page. After a country-specific certificate or statutory
variant becomes part of the task, continue with the **Configure country statutory reports and
certificates** page. After reviewing ETA totals and groupings, continue with the **Reports and
audit work** page for broader accounting reporting.

**Result:** You have the next page or task for the work that follows ETA administration.

<!-- source: admin-payments-providers-and-reconciliation.md -->

# Configure payments, providers, and reconciliation

## Payments and reconciliation administration

This page covers the accounting records used to make payment options available, review payment
activity, create matching rules, and review electronic-invoicing proxy identities.

| If you need to… | Go to… |
| --- | --- |
| Configure a provider or its payment options | [Configure payment providers and methods](#configure-payment-providers-and-methods) |
| Follow a state-dependent provider or method path | [Handle provider and method conditions](#handle-provider-and-method-conditions) |
| Review stored payment details or payment activity | [Review payment tokens and transactions](#review-payment-tokens-and-transactions) |
| Create matching rules for reconciliation | [Create reconciliation models](#create-reconciliation-models) |
| Review EDI or accounting payment-method references | [Review EDI proxy users and Accounting Payment Methods](#review-edi-proxy-users-and-accounting-payment-methods) |
| Continue payment follow-up work | [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups) |
| Continue electronic-invoicing work | [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:admin-electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting) |
| Continue broader accounting work | [Accounting dashboard, journals, and bank activity](doc:admin-accounting-dashboard-journals-and-bank-activity) |

A payment provider is the service configuration that makes payment options available. A payment
method is a named payment method that providers can support. A payment token records stored payment
details, while a payment transaction records a payment attempt and its state. A reconciliation
model defines how bank activity is matched and which counterpart entries are created. An EDI proxy
user holds the identity fields used by an electronic-invoicing connection. Accounting Payment
Methods are read-only accounting reference records with a name, payment type, and code.

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- Have access to the Accounting configuration area. Some lists are restricted to particular
  accounting permissions.
- For provider configuration, know whether the provider is installed and whether its state is
  disabled, test, or enabled.
- For a currency-restricted provider, have the currencies to select in **Available Currencies**.
- For a transaction action, open a transaction whose **State** is authorized.
- For reconciliation work, know the intended **Rule Type**, matching journals, amount rule, and
  partner-matching information.

Provider installation and state determine which provider pages and controls appear. A disabled
provider hides payment-method controls and publication controls. A provider that requires a
currency makes **Available Currencies** required while it is not disabled.

## Find and open an accounting record

Use the Accounting configuration area to reach the lists for Payment Providers, Payment Methods,
Payment Tokens, Payment Transactions, Reconciliation Models, EDI Proxy Users, and Accounting
Payment Methods. The available actions use list, kanban, and form views according to the record
type. Accounting Payment Methods use list and form views, and their search includes **Payment
Method** and **Payment Type**.

**Prerequisites**

- You know which record type matches the work you need to do.
- You have the required Accounting access.

**Steps**

1. Open the Accounting configuration area.
2. Choose the record type that matches your task.

   | If you need to… | Choose… |
   | --- | --- |
   | Configure payment services | Payment Providers or Payment Methods |
   | Review stored payment details | Payment Tokens |
   | Review payment activity | Payment Transactions |
   | Create matching rules | Reconciliation Models |
   | Review electronic-invoicing identities | EDI Proxy Users |
   | Review accounting payment references | Accounting Payment Methods |

3. Search the list by the available record name or reference.
4. Open the record you need to review or configure.

**Result:** The selected accounting list or record is on screen.

## Configure payment providers and methods

Use a payment provider to control availability and provider settings. Use a payment method to
review the options supported by providers.

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened a provider or payment-method record.
- You know the countries, currencies, and provider options that apply.

**Steps**

1. In a provider record, enter the provider **Name** and select its **State**.
2. In **Payment Methods**, review the methods available to the provider.
3. Set **Allow Tokenization**, **Capture Manually**, or **Allow Express Checkout** when those
   controls are available.
4. Set **Maximum Amount**, **Available Currencies**, and **Available Countries** for provider
   availability.
5. Choose the provider path that matches its state.

   | If the provider is… | Select… |
   | --- | --- |
   | Not installed | **Install** or **Upgrade** |
   | Disabled | **Activate** |

6. Select **Enable Payment Methods** to manage the methods available to the provider.
7. In a payment-method record, review **Name**, **Code**, **Primary Payment Method**, and
   **Active**.
8. Review **Supported Countries**, **Supported Currencies**, and **Providers**.
9. If the method is primary, review its **Brands** page.

The Payment Providers list does not provide a create form; use the provider duplication route when
you need another provider record.

Review the provider message fields when they are available: **Pending Message**,
**Authorization Message**, **Done Message**, and **Cancel Message**.

In the payment-method configuration, review **Support Tokenization**, **Support Express Checkout**,
**Support Refund**, and **Supported by**.

**Warning:** `Warning Creating a payment provider from the CREATE button is not supported. Please use the Duplicate action instead.` Use the **Duplicate** action when you need another provider record rather than creating one from the **CREATE** button.

**Warning:**

```text
These properties are set to match the behavior of providers and that of their integration with Flectra regarding this payment method. Any change may result in errors and should be tested on a test database first.
```

**Empty state — Payment Methods:** `No payment methods found for your payment providers.`

**Result:** The provider or payment method shows the availability and option settings you entered.

## Handle provider and method conditions

Provider installation, provider state, currency requirements, and whether a method is primary
change the controls and pages available to you.

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened the provider or method record.
- You can see its current state and whether the method is primary.

**Steps**

1. Choose the path that matches the record.

   | If the record is… | Use this path |
   | --- | --- |
   | Not installed | Use **Install**, **Upgrade**, or the available installation option. |
   | Disabled | Use **Activate** before managing payment-method or publication settings. |
   | Configured to require a currency and not disabled | Complete **Available Currencies**. |
   | A primary payment method | Open **Brands** when brand settings are needed. |
   | Not a primary payment method | Continue with the available method settings. |

2. Review the provider **Configuration** and **Messages** pages after the condition is handled.
3. If publication is available, use **Published** or **Unpublished** to identify the current
   publication state.

**Result:** The record is on the branch that matches its installation, state, currency, and
primary-method settings.

## Review payment tokens and transactions

Use a payment token to review stored payment details. Use a payment transaction to review a payment
reference, amount, parties, provider, and current state.

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened the Payment Tokens or Payment Transactions list.
- For transaction actions, the transaction **State** is authorized.

**Steps**

1. Open a payment token to review **Payment Details**, **Payment Method**, **Partner**, **Provider**,
   **Provider Ref**, and **Company**.
2. Select **Payments** to open transactions linked to the token.
3. Open a payment transaction and review its details.

   | Area | Fields |
   | --- | --- |
   | Transaction | **State**, **Reference**, **Source Transaction**, **Amount**, **Payment Method**, **Provider**, **Company**, **Provider Reference**, **Token**, **Created on**, **Last State Change** |
   | Contact details | **Partner**, **Address**, **Email**, **Phone**, **Language** |
   | Related activity | **Child transactions**, **Message** |
4. Choose the transaction action when **State** is authorized.

   | Action | Condition |
   | --- | --- |
   | **Capture Transaction** | **State** is authorized. |
   | **Void Transaction** | **State** is authorized and the transaction must be voided. |

   **Confirmation:** `Are you sure you want to void the authorized transaction? This action can't be undone.`

**Empty state — Payment Tokens:** `There is no token created yet.`

**Empty state — Payment Transactions:** `There are no transactions to show`.

Payment Token and Payment Transaction forms are not editable.

**Result:** The token or transaction details are on screen, or the authorized transaction has been
sent to the selected action.

## Create reconciliation models

Use a reconciliation model to match bank transactions with reusable conditions and counterpart
entries.

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened Reconciliation Models.
- You know the **Rule Type**, matching journals, and any amount, text, partner, or tolerance rules
  needed for the model.

**Steps**

1. Open a reconciliation model and enter its **Model Name**.
2. Select the **Rule Type**.
3. Set **Auto-validate**, **To Check**, **Past Months Limit**, or **Matching Order** when the
   selected rule type presents them.
4. In **Bank Transactions Conditions**, choose **Journals Availability** and set **Match Amount**.
5. Enter the amount limits that the selected **Match Amount** rule requires.
6. For invoice matching, set **Allow Payment Tolerance** and **Match Same Currency** when those
   fields are available.
7. Set the matching **Label**, **Note**, **Reference**, or **Partner** conditions that apply.
8. Add the applicable **Partner Mapping** values.
9. In **Counterpart Entries**, enter **Account**, **Amount Type**, **Journal**, **Taxes**,
   **Analytic Distribution**, **Force Tax Included**, and the line **Label** as needed.
10. Select **Journal Entries** to review journal entries associated with the model.

When **Match Amount** requires a range, the minimum and maximum amount fields are required for the
matching choice. When neither payment-reference regex nor narration regex is present, the matching
row requires one of them: `Narration regex is required; otherwise payment-reference regex is
required`.

**Empty state — Reconciliation Models:** `Create a new reconciliation model`.

**Result:** The reconciliation model contains its matching conditions and counterpart entries.

## Review EDI proxy users and Accounting Payment Methods

Use EDI Proxy Users to review electronic-invoicing identities. Use Accounting Payment Methods to
review reference records identified by **Name**, **Payment Type**, and **Code**.

**Prerequisites**

- You have access to the Accounting configuration area.
- You know whether you are reviewing an EDI identity or an accounting payment-method reference.

**Steps**

1. Open EDI Proxy Users to review **Proxy Type**, **Client ID**, **EDI Identification**, **Private
   Key**, and **Refresh Token**.
2. Open Accounting Payment Methods to review **Name**, **Payment Type**, and **Code**.
3. In the Accounting Payment Methods search, use **Payment Method** to search by name.
4. Use **Payment Type** to group the Accounting Payment Methods list.

The EDI Proxy Users list is read-only. Accounting Payment Methods are also read-only: their form
and list do not provide create, edit, or delete actions.

**Empty state — Accounting Payment Methods:** `None declared in the Accounting Payment Methods action`.

**Result:** The EDI identity or Accounting Payment Methods reference is available for review.

## When the requested page does not load

If a requested Accounting page opens the theme customizer instead, do not use that screen as the
payment or reconciliation list. The visible product controls are **Menu Style**, **Font Type**,
**Preloader Option**, **Theme Colors**, **Brand Color**, **Background Color**, **Sidebar Color**,
**Chatter Position**, **Save**, **Reset To Default**, and **Close**.

The page may also show `Session Expired`. The landed route in this case is
`/web#action=apps_menu`, rather than the requested Accounting route.

| What you see | What to do |
| --- | --- |
| `Session Expired` | Sign in again, then reopen the Accounting configuration area. |
| The theme customizer with **Menu Style** and **Theme Colors** | Return to the Accounting configuration area and choose the required record type again. |
| The requested page title is absent | Do not continue with provider, method, token, transaction, reconciliation, EDI, or Accounting Payment Methods work on that screen. |

**Result:** You are either back at the requested Accounting list or have a clear hand-off for help.

## What to do next

Provider-specific credentials belong with Payment Providers. Provider status messages belong on
the Payment Providers **Messages** page. Transaction status and messages belong with Payment
Transactions.

- Continue payment follow-up work in [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups).
- Continue electronic-invoicing work in [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:admin-electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting).
- Continue bank and journal activity in [Accounting dashboard, journals, and bank activity](doc:admin-accounting-dashboard-journals-and-bank-activity).
- If the Accounting route continues to land at the theme customizer, use [Getting help](doc:getting-help).

<!-- source: admin-warehouses-and-replenishment.md -->

# Configure warehouses and replenishment

Use this page to configure the warehouse structure and stock-flow rules that control where
inventory is stored, moved, replenished, and dispatched.

## What warehouse and replenishment configuration controls

A warehouse is the inventory structure you administer. Locations describe where stock is held;
routes and rules describe how it moves; operation types describe how a stock operation is handled;
storage categories and putaway rules control capacity and destinations; reordering rules and
replenishment control stock supply; and GİB plate records support GİB e-Dispatch configuration.

| If you need to… | Go to |
| --- | --- |
| Create or change a warehouse or location | [Configure warehouses and locations](#configure-warehouses-and-locations) |
| Decide where a route can be used and how a rule acts | [Configure routes, rules, and operation types](#configure-routes-rules-and-operation-types) |
| Set storage capacity or direct arrivals to a location | [Configure storage capacity and putaway](#configure-storage-capacity-and-putaway) |
| Set minimum and maximum stock or replenish a line | [Configure replenishment and reordering](#configure-replenishment-and-reordering) |
| Maintain plate numbers for GİB e-Dispatch | [Configure GİB plate numbers](#configure-gib-plate-numbers) |
| Learn how to reach a destination from the application menu | [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) |
| Configure products, packages, or package types | [Configure products, packages, and delivery](doc:admin-products-packages-and-delivery) |
| Configure inventory operations and transfers | [Configure inventory overview and transfers](doc:admin-inventory-overview-and-transfers) |
| Review inventory reports | [Configure inventory reporting](doc:admin-inventory-reporting) |

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

| Have this ready | Why it matters |
| --- | --- |
| The warehouse, location, product, route, operation type, storage category, or plate record you need to change | It identifies the configuration task. |
| Shipment steps, resupply relationships, location usage, route applicability, rule action, operation code, storage limits, replenishment thresholds, and plate information | These choices determine which configuration branches you use. |
| Access to the required configuration areas | Warehouse configuration, shipment settings, resupply, technical information, routes, rules, storage, and location fields can be limited by access groups. |
| Values that must be entered together | A rule can require a source location for its action; a putaway row requires either a product or a product category when no package type is selected; and capacity rows require either a product or a package type. |
| An editable record state | Have the record ready to open or change. |

The application can show different areas for advanced locations, multiple locations, multiple
warehouses, tracking lots, multiple companies, and technical access. Use the fields and tabs that
appear for your access rather than assuming every configuration area is available.

## Find and open a configuration record

Each destination has a list; some destinations also have a form. Use the task you are performing to
choose the destination.

**Prerequisites**

- Know which configuration record you need.
- Have access to the corresponding Inventory configuration area.

**Steps**

1. Open the application menu.
2. Choose the destination that matches your task.

   | If you need to… | Open |
   | --- | --- |
   | Manage warehouse records | **Warehouses** |
   | Manage stock locations | **Locations** |
   | Define stock-flow routes | **Routes** |
   | Define route rules | **Rules** |
   | Define operation behavior | **Operations Types** |
   | Direct incoming products | **Putaway Rules** |
   | Set storage limits | **Storage Categories** |
   | Set stock thresholds | **Reordering Rules** |
   | Maintain dispatch plate records | **GİB Plate Numbers** |

3. Open an existing row to change its record, or begin a new record from the destination list.
4. If the list is empty, use the message shown for that destination as your starting point:

   | Destination | Empty-state message |
   | --- | --- |
   | **Warehouses** | `Define a new warehouse` |
   | **Locations** | `Add a new location` |
   | **Routes** | `Add a new route` |
   | **Operations Types** | `No transfer found. Let's create one!` or `Create a new operation type` |
   | **Putaway Rules** | `No putaway rule found. Let's create one!` |
   | **Storage Categories** | `Add a new storage category` |
   | **Reordering Rules** | `No reordering rule found` |

**Result:** The selected list or record is on screen, ready for configuration.

## Understand the configuration screens

The configuration surfaces combine record fields, conditional groups, tabs, embedded rows, and
editable lists. The areas you see depend on access and on values such as usage, action, operation
code, trigger, and whether another field has been selected.

> **Note:** The areas shown depend on access and on values selected in the record.

| Screen | Areas to use |
| --- | --- |
| Warehouses | The record identity fields; **Warehouse Configuration** with **Shipments** and **Resupply**; **Technical Information** with locations and operation types |
| Locations | **Additional Information**, **Cyclic Counting**, **Logistics**, and the external note field; **Putaway Rules** and **Current Stock** actions |
| Routes | **Applicable On** with product, category, packaging, and warehouse choices; embedded **Rules** rows |
| Rules | Action, source and destination locations, applicability, propagation, and options |
| Operations Types | **General** and **Hardware** tabs; reservation, return, location, lot, package, and print settings |
| Putaway Rules | Editable rows for incoming location, product or category, package type, outgoing location, storage category, and company |
| Storage Categories | **Capacity by Package** and **Capacity by Product** tabs with editable capacity rows |
| Reordering Rules | Editable stock-planning rows with quantities, locations, routes, triggers, and replenishment actions |
| GİB Plate Numbers | An editable list and a form with plate type and plate number |

**Result:** You have identified the configuration area to use. Open **Warehouses** or **Locations**
to begin the structure setup.

## Configure warehouses and locations

Configure the warehouse and location structure used to organize inventory, including shipment,
resupply, usage, counting, logistics, putaway, and stock areas.

**Prerequisites**

- Have the warehouse name, code, company, responsible partner, shipment steps, and resupply
  relationship ready.
- For a location, know its name, parent location, usage, company, and whether it is a scrap,
  return, replenishment, or counting location.
- Have the access needed for multiple locations, multiple warehouses, advanced locations, or
  storage categories when those areas are required.

**Steps**

1. Open **Warehouses**.
2. Open an existing warehouse or start a new warehouse record.
3. Open **Warehouse Configuration**.
4. In **Shipments**, choose the reception and delivery steps.
5. In **Resupply**, select the warehouses that resupply this warehouse when multiple warehouses
   are available.
6. Use **Routes** on the warehouse when you need to review its routes.
7. Open **Locations**.
8. Open an existing location or start a new location record.
9. In **Additional Information**, complete the fields that appear for the location's usage,
   including storage category, company, scrap, return, and replenishment settings.
10. In **Cyclic Counting**, set the counting frequency and dates when the location is internal or
    transit and a company is present.
11. In **Logistics**, choose the removal strategy when the field is available for the location.
12. Use **Putaway Rules** to open the rules associated with the location.
13. Use **Current Stock** to open the current stock view for the location.

**Result:** The warehouse or location record is on screen with the applicable structure,
shipment, resupply, usage, counting, logistics, putaway, and stock areas.

Open **Routes** next when the warehouse flow needs route behavior.

## Configure routes, rules, and operation types

Set route applicability, rule actions and locations, and operation-type reservation, return,
location, lot, package, and print settings.

**Prerequisites**

- Know whether the route applies to product categories, products, packages, or warehouses.
- Know the rule action, source location, destination location, operation type, propagation choice,
  and delay.
- Know the operation code, reservation method, return type, default locations, lot and package
  behavior, and print settings.

**Steps**

1. Open **Routes**.
2. Open an existing route or start a new route.
3. In **Applicable On**, select the places where the route can be selected.
4. Select **Warehouses** when the route applies to warehouses.
5. Add the applicable warehouse records when the warehouse selector appears.
6. In **Rules**, add or edit a rule row with its action, source location, and destination location.
7. Open **Rules** when you need a rule outside a route.
8. Choose the rule action.
9. Complete the source location when the action is pull, push, or pull-push.
10. Complete the fields that appear for the selected action.
11. Open **Operations Types**.
12. Open an operation type or start a new operation type.
13. On **General**, choose the operation code and reservation settings.
14. Complete the return, default location, backorder, lot, and package settings that appear for
    the operation code and access.
15. Open **Hardware** when the operation code is incoming, outgoing, or internal.
16. Choose the print settings that apply, then choose the label format when its print option is
    enabled.

**Result:** The route, rule, or operation type is on screen with the branch-specific choices and
rows required for the selected stock flow.

Open **Storage Categories** next when the flow needs storage capacity or putaway behavior.

## Configure storage capacity and putaway

Set storage capacity and direct arriving products, categories, and packages to destination
locations.

**Prerequisites**

- Know the incoming and destination locations.
- Choose whether the rule applies to a product, product category, or package type.
- Have the capacity quantity and unit information ready.

**Steps**

1. Open **Storage Categories**.
2. Open a storage category or start a new one.
3. Enter the category name and choose whether new products are allowed.
4. Enter the maximum weight when a maximum weight applies.
5. Open **Capacity by Package** when package capacity applies.
6. Add a package type and its quantity in the capacity row.
7. Open **Capacity by Product** when product capacity applies.
8. Add a product and its quantity in the capacity row.
9. Open **Putaway Rules**.
10. Add an editable rule row.
11. In **When product arrives in**, select the location where the product arrives.
12. Select **Product**, **Product Category**, or **Package type** for the rule.
13. Select the destination location when the product must be stored there.
14. Select **Having Category** when the rule uses a storage category.

The product and category choices are conditional: when no category or package type is selected,
the product is required; when no product or package type is selected, the category is required.
The outgoing location becomes available after an incoming location is selected.

**Result:** The storage category or putaway row is on screen with its capacity or destination
choices.

Open **Reordering Rules** next when the flow needs stock thresholds.

## Configure replenishment and reordering

Set product stock thresholds and use replenishment choices for a warehouse or location.

**Prerequisites**

- Know the product, warehouse or location, route, minimum quantity, maximum quantity, quantity
  multiple, and trigger.
- Use **Reordering Rules** for saved threshold rules.
- Use the replenishment list for the current manual replenishment view.

**Steps**

1. Open **Reordering Rules**.
2. Open an existing rule or start a new rule.
3. Select the product.
4. Enter the minimum and maximum quantities.
5. Enter **Quantity Multiple** when orders must use a quantity multiple.
6. Select the warehouse and location when those fields are available.
7. Select the route and trigger for the rule.
8. Open the replenishment view.
   If no replenishment is needed, the page displays `You are good, no replenishment to perform!`.
9. Review the on-hand quantity, forecast quantity, quantity to order, and visible planning fields.
10. Choose the stock-planning detail you need:

    | If you need to… | Select |
    | --- | --- |
    | Review the forecast | **Forecast Report** |
    | Read replenishment details | **Replenishment Information** |
11. Choose the action that matches the replenishment decision:

    | If you need to… | Reader action |
    | --- | --- |
    | Create an order now when the quantity to order is greater than zero | Select **Order Once** |
    | Make replenishment automatic when the quantity to order is greater than zero and the trigger is not automatic | Select **Automate** |
    | Defer a line that uses a manual trigger | Select **Snooze** |

12. Open the rule form and select **Run the scheduler** when you need to trigger reordering now.
13. Select **Forecast Description** from the rule form when the forecast explanation is available.

The replenishment view uses manual-trigger and not-snoozed filters. **Order Once** and **Automate**
depend on a positive quantity to order; **Automate** also depends on a non-automatic trigger; and
**Snooze** depends on a manual trigger.

**Result:** The replenishment list or reordering rule is on screen with the applicable threshold,
forecast, trigger, and action choices.

Open **GİB e-Dispatch** next when you need to maintain plate numbers.

## Configure GİB plate numbers

Maintain plate number and plate-number type records for GİB e-Dispatch.

**Prerequisites**

- Have the plate number and plate-number type ready.
- Have access to **GİB e-Dispatch** and **GİB Plate Numbers**.

**Steps**

1. Open **GİB e-Dispatch**.
2. Open **GİB Plate Numbers**.
3. Add a row in the editable list, or open the form.
4. Select the plate-number type.
5. Enter the value in the `Plate Number` field.

**Result:** The GİB Plate Numbers list or form is on screen with the plate type and plate number
fields.

If a configuration destination does not open, continue with the troubleshooting checks below.

## When a configuration area is not visible

If opening a warehouse-configuration destination returns to
`https://demo.sherkety.org/web#action=apps_menu`, the destination has not opened.
**Reordering Rules** and **GİB Plate Numbers** can retain their requested URLs while showing none
of the expected labels.

| What you see | What to do |
| --- | --- |
| `Warehouses` is not on screen | Return to the application menu and use [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) to reopen the destination. |
| `Locations`, `Routes`, `Rules`, `Operations Types`, `Putaway Rules`, or `Storage Categories` is not on screen | Use the corresponding destination in [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics), then check which configuration areas appear for your access. |
| `Reordering Rules`, `Order Once`, `Automate`, or `Snooze` is not on screen | Reopen the Reordering Rules destination and inspect the line's quantity-to-order and trigger values. |
| `GİB Plate Numbers` or `GİB Plate Number` is not on screen | Reopen **GİB e-Dispatch** and **GİB Plate Numbers** from the application menu. |
| The page remains blank | Stop looking for a field on that page and resolve the destination or access path first. |

**Result:** The destination outcome is identified, and you can continue with the related inventory
configuration task when the destination opens.

## What to configure next

After warehouse configuration, use the related administrative pages for the records that feed or
consume it. [Configure products, packages, and delivery](doc:admin-products-packages-and-delivery)
covers product and package data used by putaway and storage choices. [Configure inventory overview
and transfers](doc:admin-inventory-overview-and-transfers) covers the
operations that use warehouses, locations, routes, and operation types. [Configure inventory
reporting](doc:admin-inventory-reporting) covers the reports that read
inventory movement and stock information.

For replenishment, the configured rule provides the threshold and trigger choices used by the
replenishment view. **Run the scheduler** is the available form action for triggering reordering
now.

**Result:** You know which related page to open after setting warehouse structure, stock-flow
rules, storage behavior, or replenishment thresholds.

<!-- source: electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting.md -->

# Electronic invoicing and local reporting

Use this page to choose an electronic-invoicing or local-reporting destination,
review submitted invoices, configure country-specific settings, and prepare a
DATEV export.

## Electronic invoicing and local reporting

Electronic invoicing and local reporting are the Accounting destinations used to
submit, review, configure, or export invoice information for a country-specific
authority or reporting format. Use the destination that matches the work you need
to do.

ETA means the Egypt Tax Authority in invoice statistics and connection
messages.

| If you need to… | Go to |
| --- | --- |
| Review invoices submitted to Egypt's Tax Authority | [Review ETA invoice statistics](#review-eta-invoice-statistics) |
| Configure responsibility, document, payment, certificate, thumb-drive, or ETA settings | [Configure local e-invoicing destinations](#configure-local-e-invoicing-destinations) |
| Prepare a German accounting export | [Export DATEV data](#export-datev-data) |
| Work with broader country reports and certificates | [Country statutory reports and certificates](doc:country-statutory-reports-and-certificates) |
| Configure these destinations for other users | [Configure electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:admin-electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting) |
| Review broader accounting and audit reports | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |

## Before you start

Access to these destinations depends on your assigned accounting, manager, system,
or multi-company permissions. The available destination can also depend on the
company and the selected integration mode.

| Before you begin | What to have or check |
| --- | --- |
| Access | The relevant Accounting permission. Thumb Drive requires the accounting manager group; ETA Configurations requires the ERP manager group; the Spain certificate destinations have system or accounting-manager restrictions. |
| Company context | The company whose invoices, certificates, or configuration you are working with. Company filters and company columns require multi-company access. |
| Integration mode | The mode selected in ETA Configurations. Direct mode uses Direct Mode Credentials; service-provider mode uses Service Provider Credentials. |
| Reporting period | The dates and, if needed, the journals for a DATEV export. |
| Saved records | A saved configuration and the required country-specific records before you rely on a submission or export result. |

Review the fields displayed after opening a destination before entering values. The
available fields can change with company configuration.

## Find a reporting destination

The Accounting menu groups the electronic-invoicing and local-reporting destinations
under the labels `e-Faktur`, **ETA E-Invoicing Statistics**, **DATEV Export**, and
`FEC`.

**Prerequisites**

- You are signed in.
- You know whether you need statistics, configuration, or an export.

**Steps**

1. Open **Accounting**.
2. Select the destination that matches your work.

   | If you need to… | Select |
   | --- | --- |
   | Review submitted ETA invoices | **ETA E-Invoicing Statistics** |
   | Export accounting data for Germany | **DATEV Export** |
   | Configure ETA, certificate, thumb-drive, responsibility, document, or payment settings | The corresponding country-specific destination |
   | Work with broader statutory reports or certificates | Country statutory reports and certificates in the related page |

3. Confirm that the destination title matches the work you selected.

   

**Result:** If the selected destination opens, continue with its task. If the page
opens at `/web`, return to **Accounting** and choose the destination again.

## Review ETA invoice statistics

ETA E-Invoicing Statistics is a reporting view for customer invoices and refunds
that have an ETA submission number. Use it to review submission identifiers, dates,
customers, status, companies, and totals.

**Prerequisites**

- You have access to the ETA reporting destination.
- Submitted customer invoices or refunds are available for the period you want to review.

**Steps**

1. Open **ETA E-Invoicing Statistics** from the Accounting menu.
2. Review the initial **This Month** and **Submitted to ETA** filters.
3. Apply an optional filter when the review needs one.

   | If you need to… | Select |
   | --- | --- |
   | Review invoices with an ETA UUID | **With ETA UUID** |
   | Review the current year | **This Year** |

4. Use the grouping choices to choose one of these views:

   | If you need to compare… | Select |
   | --- | --- |
   | Customers | **Customer** |
   | Dates | **Invoice Date** |
   | Invoice states | **Status** |
   | Companies | **Company** |

5. Review the available invoice number, invoice date, customer, ETA identifier,
   submission identifier, total, status, and company columns.
6. Use the submitted-invoice list as a read-only list; create and edit are disabled there.

**Result:** The statistics view is filtered to the submitted customer invoices and
refunds selected by the available date, identifier, grouping, and company choices.

## Configure local e-invoicing destinations

The configuration destinations hold the country-specific reference data and
credentials used by local electronic-invoicing work. Use the destination for the
country or service you are setting up.

**Prerequisites**

- You have the permission required by the selected destination.
- You know which company the configuration belongs to.
- For ETA setup, you know whether the integration uses direct mode or a service provider.

**Steps**

1. Open the relevant destination from **Accounting**.
2. Select the destination for the setup you need.

   | If you need to configure… | Open |
   | --- | --- |
   | Argentine responsibility records | **Responsibility Types** |
   | Argentine document letters and document filters | **Document Types** |
   | Ecuadorian payment references | **Payment Methods SRI** |
   | ETA company mode, submission mode, environment, or threshold | **ETA Configurations** |
   | ETA certificate and signing-drive details | **Thumb Drive** |
   | Spanish EDI certificates | **Certificates (ES)** or **Certificates** |

3. Complete the fields shown for the selected destination.

   | Destination | Fields or controls to use |
   | --- | --- |
   | **Responsibility Types** | **Name**, **Code**, and **Active** |
   | **Document Types** | The Argentine document letter; use **Document Letter** for grouping. |
   | **Payment Methods SRI** | **Code**, **Name**, and **Active**; create and edit are disabled. |
   | **ETA Configurations** | **Company**, **Mode**, **Submission Mode**, **Production Environment**, and **Invoicing Threshold**. |
   | **Thumb Drive** | **Company**, **PIN**, the access token, and the certificate action. |
   | **Certificates (ES)** | Certificate content, password, **Validity**, start date, end date, and **Company**. |

4. In ETA Configurations, select the mode that matches the credentials you have.

   | If you select… | Use… |
   | --- | --- |
   | Direct mode | Direct Mode Credentials |
   | Service-provider mode | Service Provider Credentials |

5. In Thumb Drive, select **Get certificate** when the certificate is not already present.

The **Company** field is read-only in ETA Configurations. The credential pages appear
according to the selected mode, and **Get certificate** is hidden when a certificate
already exists.

**Result:** The selected country-specific destination displays the fields and
credentials for the chosen company and integration mode.

## Export DATEV data

DATEV Export prepares accounting data for a selected period and, optionally, selected
journals. Use it when your reporting process requires a DATEV file.

**Prerequisites**

- DATEV Consultant Number and Client Number are configured in Settings > Accounting > DATEV Export.
- You know the first and last date of the period to export.
- You know whether to limit the export to particular journals.

**Steps**

1. Open **DATEV Export** from the Accounting menu.
2. Enter the first date in **Date From**.
3. Enter the last date in **Date To**.
4. Optional: select journals in **Journals**.
5. Select **Export**.
6. If the export stops, follow the matching correction.

   | If you see… | Do this |
   | --- | --- |
   | `'Date From' must be before 'Date To'.` | Correct **Date From** and **Date To**. |
   | `No posted journal entries found for the selected period.` | Choose a period that contains posted journal entries. |

**Result:** The export form processes the selected period and journals.

## Handle errors and access branches

Use the message text to identify whether the problem concerns DATEV setup, the date
range, the selected period, ETA connection settings, or invoice submission. The ETA
connection and invoice-submission messages belong to their owning work areas.

| Message | Meaning | Next action |
| --- | --- | --- |
| `Please configure the DATEV Consultant Number and Client Number in Settings > Accounting > DATEV Export.` | DATEV company settings are incomplete. | Configure both DATEV numbers, then reopen **DATEV Export**. |
| `'Date From' must be before 'Date To'.` | The selected DATEV dates are reversed. | Set **Date From** earlier than **Date To**. |
| `No posted journal entries found for the selected period.` | The DATEV period contains no posted journal entries. | Select a period with posted journal entries. |
| `Failed to create or retrieve ETA configuration for company %s` | The ETA configuration could not be created or retrieved for the company. | Check the company configuration and contact your administrator. |
| `Please configure your ETA credentials before testing the connection.` | ETA credentials are missing when the connection test is run. | Use the ETA connection settings page. |
| `Successfully connected to Egypt Tax Authority API. Your credentials are valid.` | The ETA connection test succeeds. | Continue with the ETA work that required the connection. |
| `Please only sign invoices from one company at a time` | Invoice signing includes more than one company. | Run signing for one company at a time. |
| `No eligible invoices to submit. Invoices must be:` | No invoice meets the submission conditions. | Check the invoice status, country, submission state, and invoice type in the invoice area. |
| `ETA invoice has been received` | An ETA invoice PDF has been received. | Open the invoice record to review the received document. |

**Result:** You have a corrective action matched to the message you see.

## Know what is next

After you finish work here, continue with the page that owns the next country-specific
or administrative task.

| After this work… | Continue with… |
| --- | --- |
| You need country-specific reports or certificates beyond these destinations | [Country statutory reports and certificates](doc:country-statutory-reports-and-certificates) |
| You need to configure or troubleshoot access for other users | [Configure electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:admin-electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting) |
| You need administrative country-specific certificates or reports | [Configure country statutory reports and certificates](doc:admin-country-statutory-reports-and-certificates) |
| You need broader financial or audit reports | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |

The available next step depends on the destination you selected and the work your
company needs to complete.

<!-- source: navigation-basics.md -->

# Navigation basics

## What navigation basics covers

A destination is a product area you open from a menu entry. The Accounting **Dashboard** is the
Accounting entry point, and **Inventory Overview** is the Inventory entry point.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Open the Accounting destination | [Find and open a destination](#find-and-open-a-destination) |
| Open the Inventory destination | [Find and open a destination](#find-and-open-a-destination) |
| Understand the application shell | [Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface) |
| Work with the Accounting Dashboard | [Accounting Dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard) |
| Work with Inventory Overview | [Inventory Overview](doc:inventory-overview) |

## Before you start

Prerequisites

Sign in before opening a destination. Your available menu entries depend on your permissions.

| Before you start | What it affects |
|---|---|
| You are signed in | The product menu is available. |
| Your permissions include Accounting access | **Dashboard** is available under Accounting. |
| Your permissions include Invoicing access | **Invoicing** is available. |

## Find and open a destination

Use **Dashboard** for the Accounting entry point or **Inventory Overview** for the Inventory entry
point.

Steps

1. Select the product menu.
2. Select the destination that matches your work:

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Open the Accounting entry point | **Accounting**, then **Dashboard** |
   | Open the Inventory entry point | **Inventory**, then **Inventory Overview** |

3. Confirm that the selected destination page appears.

After the Dashboard page appears, continue with [Accounting Dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard).
After the Inventory page appears, continue with [Inventory Overview](doc:inventory-overview).

**Result:** The selected Accounting or Inventory destination is on screen.

## Recognize the destination screen

Use the menu label to recognize the destination you opened. **Inventory Dashboard** is a separate
Inventory menu entry.

| Destination you opened | What to recognize |
|---|---|
| **Dashboard** | The Accounting entry point. |
| **Inventory Overview** | The Inventory entry point. |
| **Inventory Dashboard** | A separate Inventory menu entry. |

<!-- source: products-packages-and-delivery.md -->

# Products, packages and delivery

## Products, packages and delivery

Inventory setup records describe what you stock, how it is packed, and which delivery
rules apply to it. Product packaging records describe a product's contained quantity and
barcode. Package types describe the size, weight, and capacity of a shipping container.
Packages collect products for movement, while barcode nomenclatures and zip prefixes
help interpret scans and delivery coverage.

The setup records include products, variants, lots and serial numbers, packaging, package types,
delivery data, units of measure, shipping methods, zip prefixes, and barcode nomenclatures.
These records support the movement of goods through transfers and delivery work.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Find or update product packaging | [Maintain inventory and delivery records](#maintain-inventory-and-delivery-records) |
| Find or update a package type | [Maintain inventory and delivery records](#maintain-inventory-and-delivery-records) |
| Find or update a package | [Maintain inventory and delivery records](#maintain-inventory-and-delivery-records) |
| Work with barcode nomenclatures or zip prefixes | [Maintain inventory and delivery records](#maintain-inventory-and-delivery-records) |
| Understand fields that depend on access or company setup | [Handle configuration-dependent fields](#handle-configuration-dependent-fields) |
| Continue with transfers and returns | [Inventory transfers and returns](doc:inventory-transfers-and-returns) |
| Configure warehouse structure and replenishment | [Warehouses and replenishment](doc:warehouses-and-replenishment) |
| Open the inventory hub | [Inventory Overview](doc:inventory-overview) |
| Read movement and valuation information | [Inventory reporting](doc:inventory-reporting) |
| Configure the administrative counterpart | [Configure products, packages, and delivery](doc:admin-products-packages-and-delivery) |

## Before you start

Before you maintain these records, decide which record type you need and collect the
information that belongs to it. Product packaging requires a product and a contained
quantity. A package type uses dimensions, weight, and an optional barcode. A package
uses a package reference and can contain product quantities. A barcode nomenclature uses
a name, a UPC/EAN conversion choice, and its rules. A zip prefix uses a prefix.

**Prerequisites**

| Check | Why it matters |
|---|---|
| Know whether you are maintaining Product Packagings, Package Types, Packages, Barcode Nomenclatures, or Zip Prefix | Each record type has its own list and form. |
| Have the product and contained quantity for a product packaging | The product packaging model requires both the product and its quantity. |
| Have dimensions, weight, and any barcode for a package type | These values describe the container used for delivery. |
| Have the package reference and the content to inspect | The package form identifies the package and lists its contents. |
| Have the nomenclature name, conversion choice, and barcode rules | The nomenclature form stores the conversion choice and its rule list. |
| Have the delivery prefix | Zip Prefix stores a required prefix. |
| Have the access needed for the menu entry | Package Types, Packages, Barcode Nomenclatures, and Zip Prefix can be limited by access groups. |

Product unit-of-measure fields appear only for users in the relevant unit-of-measure group. Company
fields appear according to multi-company access. Storage-category capacity appears only
when storage categories are enabled for the relevant group. Package owner, lot or serial,
and unit-of-measure details also depend on their respective access groups.

## Find a record

Use the Inventory menu to reach the maintenance list. Choose the destination that matches
the record you need, then use the fields available on that list to locate an existing
record. The Packages list can search by package name, location, or package type and can
group results by location or package type.

**Prerequisites**

- You know which record type you need.
- You have access to the corresponding Inventory destination.

**Steps**

1. Open Inventory.
2. Open the destination that matches your task.

   | If you need to… | Open |
   |---|---|
   | Maintain product-level packaging | **Product Packagings** under Products |
   | Maintain shipping-container dimensions and weight | **Package Types** under Delivery |
   | Inspect products collected for movement | **Packages** under Inventory products |
   | Maintain barcode interpretation rules | **Barcode Nomenclatures** under Products |
   | Maintain a delivery area prefix | **Zip Prefix** under Delivery |

3. In Packages, enter a package name, location, or package type in the matching search field.
4. Group Packages by Location or Package Type when you need to review records together.

For product variants, lots or serial numbers, units of measure, shipping methods, or
carriers, open the relevant product, warehouse, or delivery administration destination
before maintaining that record.

**Result:** The selected list or form is open, and Packages can be narrowed by package name,
location, or package type.

## Understand the maintenance screens

Each maintenance screen starts with the record identity and then supplies the values that
describe its packaging, container, contents, or delivery rule. Work from the labels and
columns visible on the screen.

| Screen | Main fields and areas |
|---|---|
| Product Packagings | Sequence, Product, Packaging, Contained quantity, Product unit of measure, Barcode, and Company. |
| Package Types | Package Type, Height, Width, Length, Length unit of measure label, Weight, Weight unit of measure label, Max Weight, Barcode, Company, and Storage Category Capacity. |
| Packages | Package Reference, Package Type, Company, Owner, Location, Pack Date, and Content. |
| Package content | Product, Lot/serial number, Quantity, and Product unit of measure. |
| Barcode Nomenclatures | Barcode Nomenclature, UPC/EAN Conversion, and Rules. Rules contain Sequence, Name, Type, Encoding, and Pattern. |
| Zip Prefix | Prefix. |

Product Packagings can use an inline list that is editable at the bottom. Package Types
can contain an inline Storage Category Capacity list with Storage category and Quantity.
Packages provide **Unpack** and **Package Transfers** actions on a saved package.

After you open a Zip Prefix record, use the fields shown on that form.

The Packages list and kanban views identify packages with their display name, Package Type,
and Location. Package Types list Height, Width, Length, Max Weight, and Barcode alongside
the name. Barcode Nomenclatures show their name in the list and expose the conversion and
rule areas on the form.

## Maintain inventory and delivery records

Use these procedures to create or update the five record types listed below.

### Maintain product packaging

Product packaging identifies how many units a product contains in a particular package and
can carry a packaging barcode.

**Prerequisites**

- You know the product and the contained quantity.
- You know the packaging name and any barcode.

**Steps**

1. Open **Product Packagings**.
2. Select an existing packaging record or start a new record from the list.
3. In **Packaging**, enter the packaging name.
4. In **Product**, select the product.
5. In **Contained quantity**, enter the number of product units in the packaging.
6. In **Barcode**, enter the packaging barcode when one is assigned.
7. Use the inline list when you need to update a row directly in the list.

**Result:** The product packaging record contains its product, packaging name, contained
quantity, and any barcode entered.

### Maintain a package type

A package type describes the physical container used for delivery, including its dimensions,
weight, maximum shippable weight, and barcode.

**Prerequisites**

- You know the package type name, dimensions, and weight.
- You know whether the package type needs a barcode or storage-category capacity.

**Steps**

1. Open **Package Types**.
2. Select an existing package type or start a new record from the list.
3. In **Name**, enter the package type name.
4. In **Height**, enter the container height.
5. In **Width**, enter the container width.
6. In **Length**, enter the container length.
7. In **Weight**, enter the base weight.
8. In **Max Weight**, enter the maximum weight shippable in the container.
9. In **Barcode**, enter the package type barcode when one is assigned.
10. In **Storage Category Capacity**, add a row when this area is available.
11. In **Storage category**, select the storage category.
12. In **Quantity**, enter the capacity for that category.

**Result:** The package type contains its dimensions, weight values, barcode, and any storage
category capacity rows you entered.

### Maintain a package

A package collects product quantities for movement and can be moved as one package or
unpacked into individual units.

**Prerequisites**

- You know the package reference.
- You have the package type, location, pack date, and content information available.

**Steps**

1. Open **Packages**.
2. Select an existing package or start a new package from the list.
3. In **Package Reference**, enter the package reference.
4. In **Package Type**, select the package type.
5. In **Location**, select the location when the field is available.
6. Enter a date in **Pack Date**.
7. Review **Content**.
8. In each content row, review Product, Lot/serial number, Quantity, and Product unit of measure.
9. Select **Package Transfers** when you need to review transfers associated with the package.
10. Select **Unpack** when you need to release the contents as individual units.

When **Unpack** completes, the application reports `Quantities unpacked`.

**Result:** The package record shows its reference, type, location, pack date, and content,
or its contents have been unpacked.

### Maintain a barcode nomenclature

A barcode nomenclature defines how barcodes are recognized and categorized. Its rules are
checked in sequence, and a matching rule interprets the barcode.

**Prerequisites**

- You know the nomenclature name and the required UPC/EAN conversion choice.
- You have the rules and their patterns available.

**Steps**

1. Open **Barcode Nomenclatures**.
2. Select an existing nomenclature or start a new record from the list.
3. In **Barcode Nomenclature**, enter the nomenclature name.
4. In **UPC/EAN Conversion**, select the conversion choice.
5. In **Rules**, add or review the rule rows.
6. For each rule, enter Sequence, Name, Type, Encoding, and Pattern.

When the list is empty, it can display `Add a new barcode nomenclature`.

**Result:** The barcode nomenclature contains its name, conversion choice, and ordered rules.

### Maintain a zip prefix

A zip prefix is a delivery-area prefix assigned to a delivery carrier to restrict where the
carrier is available.

**Prerequisites**

- You know the delivery prefix.
- You have access to the Zip Prefix destination.

**Steps**

1. Open **Zip Prefix**.
2. Select an existing prefix or start a new record from the list.
3. In **Prefix**, enter the delivery prefix.

The list describes this area with `Manage delivery zip prefixes`. It also explains that
`Delivery zip prefixes are assigned to delivery carriers to restrict which zips it is available to.`

**Result:** The Zip Prefix record contains the delivery prefix.

## Handle configuration-dependent fields

Some fields appear only when your access and company configuration allow them. Use the
following branches instead of looking for the same fields on every account.

**Prerequisites**

- You know which company and access groups apply to your work.
- You are viewing the relevant maintenance form.

**Steps**

1. Check whether the product unit-of-measure field is available before using it.
2. Check whether Company is available when you work in a multi-company setup.
3. Check whether Storage Category Capacity is available on Package Types.
4. Check whether Owner is available on Packages.
5. Check whether Lot/serial number is available in Package Content.
6. Check whether Product unit of measure is available in Package Content.
7. If a destination is absent from the menu, ask an administrator to review the access group for that destination.

| If you see… | Work with… |
|---|---|
| Product unit-of-measure fields | The unit-of-measure-enabled product or content fields |
| Company | The company value for the active multi-company context |
| Storage Category Capacity | Storage category and Quantity rows |
| Owner | The package owner value |
| Lot/serial number | The lot or serial value in Content |
| No Barcode Nomenclatures destination | Access for the restricted Barcode Nomenclatures menu |
| No Zip Prefix destination | Access for the restricted Zip Prefix menu |

**Result:** You use the fields available for your company and access configuration without
creating duplicate records to compensate for a hidden field.

## When validation or access goes wrong

Use the exact message on screen to choose the correction. The validation messages below
come from packaging and package-type rules.

| Message | Meaning | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| `Contained Quantity should be positive.` | The packaging quantity is zero or negative. | Enter a positive value in **Contained quantity**. |
| `A barcode can only be assigned to one packaging.` | The packaging barcode is already assigned to another packaging. | Use a barcode assigned to only this packaging. |
| `A product already uses the barcode` | The barcode is already used by a product. | Use a different packaging barcode. |
| `A barcode can only be assigned to one package type!` | The package type barcode is already assigned. | Use a different package type barcode. |
| `Height must be positive` | The package type height is below zero. | Enter a non-negative value in **Height**. |
| `Width must be positive` | The package type width is below zero. | Enter a non-negative value in **Width**. |
| `Length must be positive` | The package type length is below zero. | Enter a non-negative value in **Length**. |
| `Max Weight must be positive` | The package type maximum weight is below zero. | Enter a non-negative value in **Max Weight**. |

If the Packages route opens the application menu instead of Packages, use the Inventory
menu path in [Find a record](#find-a-record) and open **Packages** from there. The route
that landed on the application menu was `/web#action=apps_menu`.

The application menu displayed **Menu Style**, **Font Type**, **Preloader Option**,
**Theme Colors**, **Brand Color**, **Background Color**, **Sidebar Color**, and
**Chatter Position**, together with **Save** and **Reset To Default**. These controls
belong to the shell's personalization area, not to package maintenance.

## Continue the inventory flow

Packages connect setup records to the movement of goods. Packages are usually created
through transfers during the packing operation and can contain different products. After
creation, the whole package can be moved at once, or its products can be unpacked and moved
as individual units.

**Prerequisites**

- You have finished maintaining the record relevant to the next inventory operation.
- You know whether the next action is a transfer, warehouse configuration task, overview
  review, or report.

**Steps**

1. Select **Package Transfers** when you need to review the transfers associated with a package.
2. Select **Unpack** when the products must move as individual units.
3. Open the page that matches your next task.

   | If you need to… | Open |
   |---|---|
   | Continue transfer work | [Inventory transfers and returns](doc:inventory-transfers-and-returns) |
   | Continue warehouse configuration | [Warehouses and replenishment](doc:warehouses-and-replenishment) |
   | Return to the operational hub | [Inventory Overview](doc:inventory-overview) |
   | Review movement and valuation information | [Inventory reporting](doc:inventory-reporting) |

The empty Packages list can display `Create a new package`, followed by guidance that
`Packages are usually created via transfers (during pack operation) and can contain different products.`
It also explains that `Once created, the whole package can be moved at once, or products can be unpacked and moved as single units again.`

**Result:** You have a direct next step for package movement, warehouse configuration,
inventory overview, or inventory reporting.

<!-- source: what-you-can-do-with-sherkety-erp.md -->

# What you can do with Sherkety ERP

Sherkety ERP brings the covered Invoicing, Inventory, and Accounting work areas into one
application menu. A landing screen is the first page for a work area, where its main groups and
next actions are gathered. Use this page to choose the area that matches your work, open its
landing screen, and continue to the detailed task page.

| If you need to… | Go to |
| --- | --- |
| Open a destination from the application menu | [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) |
| Understand the application shell | [Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface) |
| Work from the Accounting landing screen | [Accounting Dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard) |
| Work from the Inventory landing screen | [Inventory Overview](doc:inventory-overview) |
| Work with customers, products, and invoices | [Customers, products, and invoices](doc:customers-products-and-invoices) |
| Process inventory transfers and returns | [Inventory transfers and returns](doc:inventory-transfers-and-returns) |
| Run accounting reports and audit work | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |
| Get help when a destination does not open as expected | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) |

## Before you start

Sherkety ERP starts from a signed-in application shell: the signed-in frame from which you open
work areas. The available destinations and their ordering depend on your account, so use the
labels currently shown in your application menu.

**Prerequisites**

- You are signed in to Sherkety ERP.
- You know whether your next task belongs to Invoicing, Inventory, or Accounting.

## Choose the work area that matches your task

Invoicing covers customer-facing invoice and payment work. Inventory covers the movement,
products, and reporting of stock. Accounting covers journals, bank activity, configuration,
payments, budgets, assets, analytic accounting, and reports.

Use this table to choose the branch before opening a destination.

| If you need to… | Choose this work area |
| --- | --- |
| Work with invoices, customers, products, payments, follow-ups, or electronic invoicing | Invoicing |
| Work with receipts, deliveries, internal movement, products, warehouses, replenishment, or stock reports | Inventory |
| Work with journals, bank activity, taxes, payments, budgets, assets, analytic accounting, or financial reports | Accounting |

**Steps**

1. Choose the row that matches your task.
2. Select the corresponding application destination when it is shown in the menu.

**Result:** You have chosen the work area that matches your task and are ready to locate its
destination.

## Find a covered destination

An application tile is an entry that opens a work area from the application menu. Its visible
name comes from the menu, so work from the name shown on your screen.

**Steps**

1. Open the application menu.
2. In the table below, select the destination label shown for the work area you chose.

| Work area | Destination |
| --- | --- |
| Invoicing | The destination label currently shown for this work area |
| Inventory | **Inventory** |
| Accounting | **Accounting** |

The application menu can show its sections on a mobile device or on a wider screen. The menu
also provides a back control when you are on the home menu and a previous URL is available.

**Result:** The selected work area opens and its landing screen is visible.

## Understand the covered work areas

The Accounting landing screen gathers customer, vendor, accounting, reporting, and configuration
entry points. The Inventory landing screen gathers operations, products, reporting, and
configuration entry points.

Use the headings and cards below to recognize the landing screen before choosing an action.

| Landing screen | What you can recognize there |
| --- | --- |
| Accounting Dashboard | **Customers**, **Vendors**, **Accounting**, **Reporting**, **Configuration**, **Accounting Dashboard**, **Favorites**, and **Accounting Periods** |
| Inventory Overview | **Operations**, **Products**, **Reporting**, **Configuration**, **Receipts**, **Delivery Orders**, **PoS Orders**, **Manufacturing**, and **Repairs** |

Counts displayed on Inventory cards vary by account. Use the card label, not a count from another
account, to identify the work area.

**Result:** You can recognize the landing screen and its stable work groups before selecting an
action.

## Open Accounting or Inventory work

The landing screen is a starting point for operational work: Accounting presents entry points
such as invoices, bills, bank activity, and accounting configuration, while Inventory presents
stock-operation cards and their menus.

**Steps**

1. Select the control in the row that matches the task you need to start.

| Task | Control |
| --- | --- |
| Configure accounting settings | **Configure** |
| Add a bank account | **Add a bank account** |
| Review an accounting entry point | **Review** |
| Start an accounting entry | **New Entry** |
| Start a customer invoice | **New Invoice** |
| Connect an accounting account | **Connect** |
| Start an accounting transaction | **New Transaction** |
| Upload accounting information | **Upload** |
| Work with receipts | **Receipts** |
| Work with delivery orders | **Delivery Orders** |
| Work with point-of-sale orders | **PoS Orders** |
| Work with manufacturing | **Manufacturing** |
| Work with repairs | **Repairs** |
| Open another action on an Inventory card | **Dropdown menu** |

**Result:** The action you selected is ready to continue the detailed work for that area.

## When a destination does not open as expected

A wrong landing screen means the screen you see does not match the destination you requested.
For example, a request for the application-menu route can land on `/web` and show the theme
customizer instead of the destination menu.

| What you see | What to do |
| --- | --- |
| The screen does not match the destination you selected | Return to the application menu and select the visible **Accounting** or **Inventory** destination again. |
| The destination groups do not match the work area | Use the labels in [Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface), then reopen the destination from [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics). |
| You need the detailed task after the landing screen opens | Use the destination links in **Know what to open next**. |

**Steps**

1. Read the heading on the screen that opened.
2. Select the visible **Accounting** or **Inventory** destination from the application menu again.
3. Compare the landing-screen groups with the selected work area.

The covered navigation path does not change a record stage or open a dialog by itself.

**Result:** The expected landing screen is open, or you have identified that the destination
requires help with navigation.

## Know what to open next

After you recognize the landing screen, continue to the page that owns the next task. The
landing screens are entry points; the detailed pages explain the work performed after you open
the relevant destination.

| After choosing… | Open next |
| --- | --- |
| Invoicing | [Customers, products, and invoices](doc:customers-products-and-invoices) |
| Inventory overview | [Inventory transfers and returns](doc:inventory-transfers-and-returns) or [Inventory Overview](doc:inventory-overview) |
| Inventory products and delivery | [Products, packages, and delivery](doc:products-packages-and-delivery) |
| Inventory warehouses and replenishment | [Warehouses and replenishment](doc:warehouses-and-replenishment) |
| Inventory reports | [Inventory reporting](doc:inventory-reporting) |
| Accounting journals and bank activity | [Accounting journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) |
| Accounting reference data | [Accounts, taxes, and currencies](doc:accounts-taxes-and-currencies) |
| Accounting reports | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |

**Steps**

1. Choose the row that matches the work you want to continue.
2. Select the linked page in that row.

**Result:** You have a detailed page for the work area you selected.

<!-- source: admin-budgets-assets-and-analytic-accounting.md -->

# Configure budgets, assets, and analytic accounting

## What these accounting tools are for

Use the **Accounting** menus to configure and troubleshoot analytic items and accounts,
analytic distribution models and plans, assets and asset categories, budgets and
budgetary positions, budget alerts and alert history, and generated asset entries.

Analytic accounting here means using analytic items, accounts, distribution models, and
plans to organize accounting information. An asset is a record with depreciation
information. A budget is a record with budget lines and state controls. A budget alert
defines threshold notifications, and generated entries post installment or depreciation
lines for a selected month.

Use the tools in this order when you are setting up a new area:

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Add or review analytic lines and their accounting references | [Understand the accounting screens](#understand-the-accounting-screens) |
| Set up analytic accounts, plans, or distribution rules | [Configure records and generate entries](#configure-records-and-generate-entries) |
| Define how an asset is accounted for | [Configure records and generate entries](#configure-records-and-generate-entries) |
| Create a budget, move it through its available states, or inspect its lines | [Configure records and generate entries](#configure-records-and-generate-entries) |
| Configure threshold notifications or inspect their history | [Handle state, role, and configuration branches](#handle-state-role-and-configuration-branches) |
| Continue to accounting activity and journal work | [Accounting dashboard, journals, and bank activity](doc:admin-accounting-dashboard-journals-and-bank-activity) |
| Continue to accounting reports and audit work | [Reports and audit work](doc:admin-reports-and-audit-work) |
| Prepare accounts and currencies used by these records | [Accounts, taxes, and currencies](doc:admin-accounts-taxes-and-currencies) |

The records connect through their accounting references. Analytic fields appear on
analytic lines, assets, asset categories, and budget lines. Assets carry a depreciation
board and can generate entries. Budgets carry budget lines and expose planned,
practical, and theoretical amounts. Alerts attach to budgets and record whether an
email or activity was created.

Start with [Before you start](#before-you-start) when you are ready to prepare the
records, access, and information for this work.

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

| Have this ready | Why it matters here |
|---|---|
| Access to **Assets** and **Budgets** | The asset list is restricted to the accounting manager group, and the Budgets list is also restricted to that group. |
| Access to analytic accounting | Analytic accounts, analytic plans, analytic distribution models, analytic items, and analytic fields on other records use the analytic-accounting group. |
| The company and accounts to use | Asset categories restrict their account choices to the selected company. Budget and asset records also carry company context. |
| Budget dates and a budgetary position | A budget uses a date range and budget lines. A budgetary position supplies the accounts shown on its **Accounts** tab. |
| Analytic accounts and asset categories | Budget lines can use an analytic account, and assets use an **Asset Category** restricted to purchase categories. |
| Alert thresholds and recipients | A budget alert contains a threshold, an alert type, notification choices, and additional recipients. |

Check these prerequisites before changing a record. A missing role changes which menus
and fields you can reach; a missing company or account changes which accounting choices
are available.

When these items are ready, find the accounting surface that matches your job.

## Find the accounting surface

Use the menu choices below to reach the record or list that matches the job you defined
in the overview.

**Prerequisites**

- You have access to the accounting area.
- You know whether you are opening a list, a saved record, a report, or the generated-entry wizard.

**Steps**

1. Open the accounting area using the path that matches what is on screen.

   | If… | Do this |
   |---|---|
   | the application menu is open | Select **Accounting**. |
   | the accounting menu is already open | Choose the budget area or another accounting surface. |

2. Choose the surface that matches your job.

   | If you need to… | Choose |
   |---|---|
   | Review analytic lines | **Analytic Items** |
   | Set distribution rules | **Analytic Distribution Models** |
   | Manage analytic account records | **Analytic Accounts** |
   | Manage analytic plan records | **Analytic Plans** |
   | Review rounding setup | **Cash Roundings** |
   | Review assets | **Assets** |
   | Set asset accounting rules | **Asset Category** |
   | Post asset or revenue-recognition lines for a month | **Generate Assets Entries** |
   | Configure budget notifications | **Budget Alerts** |
   | Review notifications that were raised | **Alert History** |
   | Manage account groupings used by budgets | **Budgetary Positions** |
   | Manage budget records | **Budgets** |
   | Compare budget amounts | **Budgets Analysis** |

3. Select the view that answers your immediate question: list, kanban, form, search,
   pivot, graph, or wizard.

**Result:** The selected accounting list, record, report, or wizard is on screen.

Use the selected surface's layout to orient yourself before changing a record.

## Understand the accounting screens

Each surface answers a different accounting question. Use the field and view tables
below to identify the information before you change it.

### Analytic surfaces

| Surface | What to look for |
|---|---|
| **Analytic Items** | Use the form fields and search fields shown on the screen for analytic-line review. The list also provides optional accounting-reference columns, and the pivot can group by partner. |
| **Analytic Distribution Models** | Use the list and form fields shown on the screen to define distribution conditions. Some list columns are optional. |
| **Analytic Accounts** | **Customer Invoices** and **Vendor Bills** are stat buttons. |
| **Analytic Plans** | Use the applicability area shown on the plan form. |

Work from the labels visible on your form when you need additional analytic-account,
distribution-model, or plan fields.

### Asset surfaces

The asset form has a header with **Confirm**, **Compute Depreciation**, **Sell or
Dispose**, **Set to Draft**, and **Modify Depreciation**. Its body includes **Asset
Category**, **Date**, first-depreciation fields, analytic accounting fields, value
fields, vendor and invoice fields, and **Analytic distribution**.

| Area | What to look for |
|---|---|
| **Depreciation Board** | Depreciation date, depreciation amount, depreciated value, residual value, and posting indicators. |
| **Depreciation Information** | Depreciation method, progress factor, **Time Method Based On**, prorata, number, period, and end fields. |
| **Asset Category** | **Journal Entries**, **Periodicity**, **Additional Options**, and **Depreciation Method** groups. |

### Budget and alert surfaces

| Surface | What to look for |
|---|---|
| **Budgetary Positions** | The **Accounts** tab contains account-code and account-name columns. |
| **Budgets** | The header contains the budget name, owner, **Period**, company, state, and **Budget Lines**. Lines contain budget, analytic, date, amount, percentage, and **Entries...** controls. |
| **Budgets Analysis** | List, form, pivot, and graph views expose planned, practical, theoretical, and percentage values. |
| **Budget Alerts** | **Notification Settings** and **Additional Recipients**, together with the budget, threshold, alert-type, and notification choices shown on the form. |
| **Alert History** | Budget and alert identifiers, alert date, threshold and actual percentages, amounts, notification status, activity, and **Message**. |

Use the matching screen description to choose the fields and controls for the
configuration procedure that follows.

## Configure records and generate entries

Use the field tables above to prepare analytic records, asset categories, assets,
budgetary positions, budgets, and alerts. The procedures below cover the actions
available for these records.

### Generate asset entries for a period

Generated entries post installment or depreciation lines for the selected month. The
wizard also states that related journal entries are generated for the period's asset or
revenue recognition lines.

**Prerequisites**

- You are in **Generate Assets Entries**.
- You know the month to process.

**Steps**

1. In the date field, select the month to process.
2. Read the wizard notice: `This wizard will post installment/depreciation lines for the selected month.`
3. Read the second notice: `This will generate journal entries for all related installment lines on this period of asset/revenue recognition as well.`
4. Select the action that matches your intention.

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Post the selected period's lines | **Generate Entries** |
   | Close the wizard without posting | **Cancel** |

**Result:** The generation action or the cancellation action has been selected from the
wizard.

### Confirm a draft asset

An asset in draft is the record on which you enter the category, dates, amounts, and
analytic distribution before confirming its accounting treatment.

**Prerequisites**

- You are editing an asset in draft.
- The asset has its **Asset Category**, date, value, and analytic information ready.

**Steps**

1. Select the action that matches the work you need to complete.

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Build the depreciation board | **Compute Depreciation** |
   | Confirm the draft asset | **Confirm** |

**Result:** The selected asset action has been selected from the draft asset header.

### Move a budget through its available states

A budget is a record with a state shown in its header. The available action depends on
that state.

**Prerequisites**

- You are editing a budget.
- The budget is in the state required by the action you need.

**Steps**

1. Select the action that matches the current budget state.

   | If the budget is… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Draft | **Confirm** |
   | Confirmed | **Approve** |
   | Validated | **Done** |
   | Cancelled | **Reset to Draft** |
   | Confirmed or validated and you need to cancel it | **Cancel Budget** |

2. Select **Entries...** on a budget line when you need to open that line's entries.

**Result:** The budget action available for the current state has been selected, or the
budget-line entries view is open.

### Create default budget alerts

Budget alerts define warning or critical thresholds and can notify people by email or
activity.

**Prerequisites**

- You are editing a budget.
- No alert exists on the budget when you use the default-alert action.

**Steps**

1. Open the budget's alert area.
2. Select **Create Default Alerts (75% Warning, 90% Critical)**.
3. Review the alert rows and their notification settings.

**Result:** Default warning and critical alert rows are requested for the budget.

Continue with the branch table when the same surface looks different from the one you
expect.

## Handle state, role, and configuration branches

The same screen changes with the record state, type, role, and company setup. Use the
following table before looking for a field or action.

| If you are working with… | The screen changes when… | What to use |
|---|---|---|
| Analytic Accounts | There are no customer invoices or vendor bills | **Customer Invoices** or **Vendor Bills** is hidden until its count allows it. |
| An asset | The state is not draft | Draft-only controls and fields become unavailable; open assets expose **Sell or Dispose** and **Modify Depreciation**. |
| An asset's first depreciation date | The first-depreciation mode is manual | The manual date field appears and is required. |
| A sale-type asset | The asset type is sale | Salvage value and purchase-only depreciation choices change. |
| An asset category | The type is purchase or sale | Asset and deferred-revenue labels and account fields change. |
| An asset category's periodicity | **Time Method Based On** is number or end | The matching number or end field appears and is required. |
| A budget alert | Alerts already exist | **Create Default Alerts (75% Warning, 90% Critical)** is hidden. |
| A budget | The budget is draft, confirmed, validated, or cancelled | The available state action changes. |
| Analytic or company-specific accounting | Your role or company setup does not include the relevant group | Analytic-accounting and multi-company fields are unavailable. |
| A list with optional columns | The list layout does not show optional columns | Use the columns available on that list; optional analytic columns are hidden by default in the declared views. |

Use the matching state, role, type, or company condition before continuing to the
troubleshooting table.

## Troubleshoot missing fields, messages, and entries

Start with the state and branch tables above. Then match the text on screen to the
message below.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| `This wizard will post installment/depreciation lines for the selected month.` | The generated-entry wizard is describing the month-level posting action. | Check the selected date, then select **Generate Entries**. |
| `This will generate journal entries for all related installment lines on this period of asset/revenue recognition as well.` | The wizard includes related recognition lines for the period. | Check the selected date and the related asset or revenue-recognition setup before selecting **Generate Entries**. |
| `Create a budget alert configuration` | The Budget Alerts list has its empty-state instruction. | Create the alert configuration using the fields in **Budget Alerts**. |
| `Set up alerts to be notified when budgets reach warning or critical thresholds.` | The Budget Alerts help text describes the threshold purpose. | Enter the threshold and alert type, then choose the notification settings. |
| `Alerts can be configured to send emails and create activities.` | Email and activity notifications are available alert settings. | Review the email, activity, and responsible-person notification choices. |
| `No alert history found` | The Alert History list has its empty-state message. | Check the budget thresholds and return to Alert History after a threshold event. |
| `Alert history will appear here when budget thresholds are reached.` | Alert history is tied to reached budget thresholds. | Review the budget and its alert configuration. |
| `Click to create a new budget.` | The Budgets list has no budget record selected for work. | Create the budget and complete its date range and budget lines. |
| `Use budgets to compare actual with expected revenues and costs` | The Budgets list help text describes the comparison purpose. | Use **Budgets Analysis** for planned, practical, theoretical, and percentage values. |

If a field is not visible, first check the role, company, record state, type, and branch
condition that controls it. If the accounting list does not open, return to **Accounting**
and choose the named menu item rather than continuing from the application menu.

After you match the message or condition, continue to the related accounting surface.

## Know what happens next

When you finish setting up or reviewing a record, continue with the surface that matches
the next accounting question:

| After you finish… | Continue with… |
|---|---|
| Reviewing entries, journals, or bank activity | [Accounting dashboard, journals, and bank activity](doc:admin-accounting-dashboard-journals-and-bank-activity) |
| Reviewing budget analysis, asset reports, or audit information | [Reports and audit work](doc:admin-reports-and-audit-work) |
| Correcting account or currency setup | [Accounts, taxes, and currencies](doc:admin-accounts-taxes-and-currencies) |

The budget and asset actions above identify the available next records and views. Use the
list, form, report, or wizard that opens after the selected
action, then continue with the related page when the next accounting question is about
journals, reports, or account setup.

**Result:** You have a defined next accounting surface for the work you just completed.

<!-- source: admin-country-statutory-reports-and-certificates.md -->

# Country-specific reports and certificates

## Country-specific reports and certificates

Country-specific accounting surfaces help administrators prepare certificates, licenses,
statutory exports, electronic-invoicing data, and country-specific report views. SInvoice is the
destination to which invoices are sent; this area defines the template and sequence used for them.
FEC is the French
accounting export.

| If you need to… | Go to |
| --- | --- |
| Find a country report, certificate, license, or SInvoice surface | [Find the country-specific surface](#find-the-country-specific-surface) |
| Check the fields and conditional areas before changing anything | [Understand the fields and conditional areas](#understand-the-fields-and-conditional-areas) |
| Enter certificate information or prepare a number range | [Configure and run the country-specific tasks](#configure-and-run-the-country-specific-tasks) |
| Select the correct country or export branch | [Choose the applicable country branch](#choose-the-applicable-country-branch) |
| Continue with operational electronic invoicing | [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting) |
| Continue with administrative electronic-invoicing settings | [Admin electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:admin-electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting) |
| Prepare broader audit or reporting work | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |
| Resolve a general application error | [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) |
| Ask for help with an unresolved issue | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) |

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- You have the accounting manager access used by the **Certificates**, **Licenses (TicketBAI)**,
  **e-Faktur**, **Templates**, and **Symbols** destinations.
- You know which country-specific surface you need and which company it applies to.
- You have multi-company access when the surface includes a company choice.
- For Italian electronic invoicing, you have an invoice or refund in the applicable saved state
  before checking or sending its integration data.

Country settings change which areas appear. A TicketBAI license area is shown for a Spanish
company. Italian company and electronic-invoicing areas are shown for an Italian company, and
some Italian details appear only after the corresponding company choice is selected.

## Find the country-specific surface

Country-specific reports and certificates are reached from accounting configuration, customer
invoicing, or reporting destinations. A list surface shows records or ranges; a wizard asks for
criteria before it produces an export or report.

1. Open the Accounting area.
2. Select the destination that matches the work you need to do.

   | If you need to… | Select |
   | --- | --- |
   | Manage Veri*Factu certificates | **Certificates** |
   | Manage TicketBAI company licenses | **Licenses (TicketBAI)** |
   | Generate the French accounting export | **FEC** |
   | Review French sales closings | **Sales Closings** |
   | Prepare the Hungarian tax export | **Tax audit export - Adóhatósági Ellenőrzési Adatszolgáltatás** |
   | Review Argentine sales by jurisdiction | **IIBB - Sales by jurisdiction** |
   | Maintain Indonesian invoice-number ranges | **e-Faktur** |
   | Maintain Italian transport documents | **DDT** |
   | Maintain Vietnamese invoice templates | **Templates** |
   | Maintain Vietnamese invoice symbols | **Symbols** |

3. Check whether the destination opens a list or a wizard.

   A list destination includes **Certificates**, **Sales Closings**, **e-Faktur**, **DDT**,
   **Templates**, and **Symbols**. **FEC** and the Hungarian tax-audit destination open forms for
   selecting export information. The Argentine destination opens a pivot report.

**Result:** You are on the country-specific list, wizard, or report surface that matches your
task.

## Understand the fields and conditional areas

The country-specific surfaces combine certificates, company settings, export criteria, number
ranges, transport documents, and report filters. Read the area that applies to your task before
entering information.

| Surface | What to look for |
| --- | --- |
| **Certificates** | Certificate content, password, a validity period, and a company choice where multi-company access applies. |
| **Licenses (TicketBAI)** | The TicketBAI license area in the company form. It appears for a Spanish company. |
| **FEC** | An **Options** area with start and end dates, a test-file choice, an export type, and excluded journals. `Technical Info` describes the file layout. |
| **Tax audit export - Adóhatósági Ellenőrzési Adatszolgáltatás** | A selection choice, date or name ranges, and a file area after an export file exists. |
| **e-Faktur** | Minimum and maximum number ranges, available numbers, and a company column when multi-company access applies. |
| **DDT** | A document name and date. The list does not offer creation or import. |
| **Sales Closings** | Closing dates, frequency, period and cumulative totals, with the record shown as read-only. |
| Italian company settings | Italian fiscal and tax information, the `Electronic Invoicing` tab, company-register details, and tax-representative details. |
| Italian invoice settings | Stamp duty, DDT, originating-document information, and Italian purchasing references in the `Electronic Invoicing` tab. |
| **IIBB - Sales by jurisdiction** | The jurisdiction filter and grouping by state and account. |

The Italian company-register details appear after **Company listed on the register of companies**
is selected. The tax-representative partner appears after `Company have a tax representative`
is selected. Italian invoice fields are editable while the invoice is in draft; after that they
are read-only. The Italian `Electronic Invoicing` tab applies to the supported invoice and
refund types for an Italian company.

With the applicable areas identified, continue to [Configure and run the country-specific tasks](#configure-and-run-the-country-specific-tasks).

## Configure and run the country-specific tasks

Use the procedure that matches the surface you opened. Do not select an action that sends data
outside the system unless that external action is intended.

### Enter certificate information

Certificate records contain the certificate content, password, validity period, and applicable
company. The validity period is identified by `Validity` on the certificate form.

**Prerequisites**

- You have the certificate file and its password.
- You know the start and end dates of the certificate's validity.
- You have the required company access if more than one company is available.

**Steps**

1. Open **Certificates**.
2. Enter the certificate content.
3. Enter the certificate password.
4. Enter the start and end dates beside `Validity`.
5. Select the applicable company when the company choice is available.

**Result:** The certificate form contains the certificate material, password, validity period,
and applicable company.

### Prepare a statutory export or report

Use one of these alternatives after opening the matching surface.

**Prerequisites**

- You know the date, name, journal, or number-range criteria required by the destination.
- You have checked the conditional fields described in [Understand the fields and conditional areas](#understand-the-fields-and-conditional-areas).

**Steps**

1. Select the row for your task in the table below.

   | If you are working with… | Do this |
   | --- | --- |
   | FEC | Complete the export criteria, then select **Generate**. Select **Cancel** to close the wizard instead. |
   | Hungarian tax audit export | Choose the applicable date or name range, then select **Export**. Select **Close** to leave the wizard. |
   | e-Faktur | Enter the number ranges assigned by the government. |
   | SInvoice | Open **Templates** to maintain invoice templates or **Symbols** to maintain invoice-sequence symbols. |
   | Italian electronic invoicing | Select **Check Sending** when the integration is in a sending or processing state. Select **Send Tax Integration** only when the external submission is intended. |

**Result:** The selected country-specific surface contains the criteria, range, or action state
for the task you chose.

The FEC surface describes its output as UTF-8 text with CSV columns separated by a pipe (`|`).
The SInvoice template controls which invoice template is used when an invoice is rendered:
`A SInvoice template is used when sending invoices to SInvoice in order to know which invoice template to use when rendering the invoice.`
The SInvoice symbol controls the invoice sequence:
`A SInvoice symbol is used when sending invoices to SInvoice in order to generate the invoice sequence.`
e-Faktur assigns a number from a configured range
when an invoice is validated, after which the invoice can be filtered for export.

Use the country conditions in the next section when more than one branch applies to your task.

## Choose the applicable country branch

Use the company, document, and selection choices that match the statutory work you are preparing.

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened the country-specific surface for the work you are preparing.
- You know the company, document type, or selection that applies to the task.

**Steps**

1. Select the row for your task in the table below.

| Country or task | Choose this branch when… | What changes |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Spain — TicketBAI | The company is Spanish. | The TicketBAI license area is available. |
| France — FEC | You need a normal export. | The lock-date warning is shown. |
| France — FEC test | You select the test-file choice. | The test-mode warning is shown and the export type is available. |
| Hungary — tax audit export | You select a date or name range. | The matching date or name fields are shown. |
| Italy — company settings | The company is Italian. | Italian company fields and the `Electronic Invoicing` tab are available. |
| Italy — company-register details | You select **Company listed on the register of companies**. | The company-register detail fields are shown. |
| Italy — tax representative | You select `Company have a tax representative`. | The tax-representative partner is shown. |
| Italy — invoice electronic invoicing | The document is a supported invoice or refund for an Italian company. | The `Electronic Invoicing` tab is shown. |
| Italy — invoice editability | The invoice is in draft. | Italian invoice fields can be edited; later states make them read-only. |
| Italy — checking a send | The integration is in a sending or processing state. | **Check Sending** is shown. |
| Indonesia — e-Faktur | You are preparing customer-invoice export. | The configured number range supplies the invoice number at validation. |
| Vietnam — SInvoice | You are preparing invoice rendering or sequencing. | Use **Templates** for rendering templates and **Symbols** for invoice sequences. |
| Argentina — IIBB | You need sales grouped by jurisdiction. | Use the jurisdiction filter and state or account grouping. |

**Result:** The fields and actions on screen match the country and record conditions for your
task.

## When a country task goes wrong

When a task stops, use the message or the location on screen to choose your next action. The
table pairs each message or screen result with its meaning and next action.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
| --- | --- | --- |
| `When you download a FEC file, the lock date is set to the end date. If you want to test the FEC file generation, please tick the test file checkbox.` | The FEC action can set the lock date unless you use the test-file choice. | Select the test-file checkbox before selecting **Generate** when you need a test export. |
| `You are in test mode. The FEC file generation will not set the lock date.` | The FEC wizard is in test mode. | Review the criteria, then select **Generate** when the test file is ready. |
| `The encoding of this text file is UTF-8. The structure of file is CSV separated by pipe '|'.` | The FEC output uses UTF-8 and pipe-separated CSV columns. | Open `Technical Info` and compare the output columns with the listed technical names. |
| The requested destination opens `/web#action=apps_menu`. | The application menu opened instead of the selected country-specific surface. | Return to the Accounting area and select the destination again. |
| **Certificates** is not on the screen after opening the certificate destination. | The certificate list did not open. | Return to the Accounting area and select **Certificates** again. |
| The page closes while a country-specific destination is loading. | The destination did not remain open long enough to display its fields. | Open the destination again and wait for its list, wizard, or report surface. |

After the destination opens and the task is ready, continue to [Know what to do next](#know-what-to-do-next).

## Know what to do next

After preparing a country-specific setting or export, continue in the page that owns the next
business action:

- Use [Admin electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:admin-electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting)
  for broader electronic-invoicing administration.
- Use [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting)
  for operational electronic-invoicing work.
- Use [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) for broader reporting and audit tasks.
- Use [Admin reports and audit work](doc:admin-reports-and-audit-work) for administrative report
  and audit settings.
- Use [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) for an application error not listed
  here.
- Use [Getting help](doc:getting-help) when a route, sign-in, or country configuration issue
  remains unresolved.

<!-- source: admin-inventory-reporting.md -->

# Configure inventory reporting

## Inventory reporting at a glance

Inventory reporting brings together the records you use to examine stock movement, stock value,
inventory age, and catch-weight differences. Inventory aging follows remaining stock over time;
catch-weight variance compares expected and actual catch weight. Use these reports to control
access or explain why a report entry is unavailable.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Find movement, valuation, aging, or catch-weight reports | [Find an inventory report](#find-an-inventory-report) |
| Check the permissions and modules that affect access | [Before you check access](#before-you-check-access) |
| Compare a report with its listed fields, filters, and views | [Understand the report surfaces](#understand-the-report-surfaces) |
| Review report access for an account | [Review access for a report](#review-access-for-a-report) |
| Use the operational inventory reports | [Inventory reporting](doc:inventory-reporting) |
| Work with movement records that feed reports | [Configure inventory overview and transfers](doc:admin-inventory-overview-and-transfers) |
| Check warehouse and location configuration | [Configure warehouses and replenishment](doc:admin-warehouses-and-replenishment) |
| Investigate a route or access problem | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) |

The inventory reporting area contains five report entries: **Moves History**, **Move Analysis**,
**Valuation**, **Inventory Aging**, and **CW Variance Analysis**. Their list surfaces
contain 69 field entries in total; Valuation and Inventory Aging share field entries.
Valuation provides actions for checking a date, opening a journal entry, and adding a manual
valuation. The access conditions for these actions are listed below.

Start with the access checks, then find the report that answers your question.

## Before you check access

Access to inventory reports depends on the account's role groups, the installed reporting
modules, and the type of stock record being reported. Check these prerequisites before changing
an account's access so that a missing report is not mistaken for a missing record.

| Check | It affects |
|---|---|
| Production-lot access | Lot and serial-number information in Moves History |
| Tracking-lot access | Source and destination package information in Moves History |
| Multi-company access | Company information in the report lists |
| Units-of-measure access | Unit information in movement and valuation views |
| Multi-location access | Location information in Move Analysis |
| Stock-packaging access | Product packaging in Move Analysis |
| Accounting-user access | Account-move information and journal-entry actions in Valuation |
| Stock-account reporting module | Valuation and Inventory Aging menu entries |
| Catch-weight reporting module | CW Variance Analysis menu entry |
| Product records whose type is `product` | Valuation and Inventory Aging records |

When these checks are ready, use [Find an inventory report](#find-an-inventory-report) to open the
destination you need.

## Find an inventory report

An inventory report is a read-oriented destination under Inventory > Reporting. Choose the
destination that matches the question you need to answer.

**Prerequisites**

- You know which inventory question you are investigating.
- The account has the role and module access needed for that report.

**Steps**

1. Open Inventory.
2. Open Reporting.
3. Choose one report from the table.

| If you need to… | Choose |
|---|---|
| Review past product movements | **Moves History** |
| Analyse stock moves | **Move Analysis** |
| Review inventory value | **Valuation** |
| Review remaining stock by age | **Inventory Aging** |
| Review catch-weight differences | **CW Variance Analysis** |

4. Check the report title before using its search, grouping, or view controls.

The direct Moves History route can land on `/web` with `/web#action=apps_menu` instead of opening
the report. If that happens, continue with [Troubleshoot report visibility](#troubleshoot-report-visibility).

**Result:** You have selected the report that matches your inventory question, or you have a
route result to investigate before working with report data.

Next, read the report's available fields and views, then review the access conditions that apply
to the selected destination.

## Understand the report surfaces

Each report is a way to ask a different stock question. The tables below describe the fields,
search choices, groupings, and views listed for each destination; work from the labels and
headers that appear after the report opens.

### Movement reports

| Report | What it provides | Search and grouping choices |
|---|---|---|
| **Moves History** | Date, reference, product, lot, packages, locations, quantity, unit, status, and completion user | Location, product, transfer, reference, category, lot or serial number, source package, destination package, owner; To Do, Done, Incoming, Outgoing, Internal, date ranges, Inventory; group by Product, Status, Date, Transfers, Location, or Category |
| **Move Analysis** | Date, reference, product, source and destination locations, packaging, demand, quantity, unit, company, and status | Location, product, reference, source location, destination location, and partner; Ready, To Do, Done, Incoming, Outgoing, Inventory, and Date; group by Product, Operation Type, Picking, Source Location, Destination Location, Status, Creation Date, or Scheduled Date |

### Valuation and aging reports

**Valuation** lists product valuation layers with date, reference, product, company, moved
quantity, remaining quantity, unit cost, unit, value, description, and remaining value. It
includes Valuation at Date. **Journal Entry** requires accounting-user access, and **Add Manual
Valuation** is available from the product grouping when its source conditions are met.

**Inventory Aging** uses the valuation list together with pivot and graph views. Its listed
setup groups the pivot by month and product category, measures remaining quantity and remaining
value, and uses a bar graph grouped by month.

### Catch-weight variance report

**CW Variance Analysis** lists date, product, picking, picking type, partner, lot, nominal
quantity, expected catch weight, actual catch weight, absolute variance, variance percentage,
and the tolerance-exceeded indicator. Its searches cover product, partner, lot, and
picking. Its filters are **Receipts**, **Deliveries**, **Internal**, Tolerance Exceeded, and
This Month. Its groupings are Product, Partner, Transaction Type, Category, Lot, and Date
(Month); its pivot and graph views analyse variance by product and transaction type.

These report lists are read-oriented. The listed surfaces do not create records. Valuation
also disables import and duplication, and the catch-weight list does not allow editing.

Use these report descriptions before you review access for a specific destination.

## Review access for a report

Reviewing report access means comparing the report you selected with the groups and modules that
govern its fields, actions, and menu entry. Use the report name and the access table together;
the report name tells you what to test, while the access condition tells you what to check.

**Prerequisites**

- You have selected a report from Inventory > Reporting.
- You can inspect the account's inventory, location, company, accounting, units-of-measure, lot,
  package, and catch-weight access.

**Steps**

1. Identify the selected report in the report table.
2. Compare its access conditions in the table.

| Report or surface | Check |
|---|---|
| **Moves History** | Production-lot, tracking-lot, multi-company, and units-of-measure access for the corresponding fields |
| **Move Analysis** | Multi-location, stock-packaging, multi-company, and units-of-measure access |
| **Valuation** | Accounting-user access for account-move information and journal-entry actions; stock-account reporting module |
| **Inventory Aging** | Stock-account reporting module and product records whose type is `product` |
| **CW Variance Analysis** | Catch-weight reporting module |

3. Compare the report entry's availability with the checks in the table.
4. If the report entry is unavailable, continue with [Handle permission and module branches](#handle-permission-and-module-branches).

**Result:** You have a report-specific access checklist to use when reviewing account access.

If a report entry or field differs from this checklist, follow the matching permission, module,
or record-state branch next.

## Handle permission and module branches

Permission and module branches change which report entries and fields a reader can use. State
also changes how Move Analysis fields behave: completed moves make several fields read-only, and
the form changes its date label between scheduled and processing dates.

**Prerequisites**

- You have selected the report whose access differs from the expected path.
- You have the report-specific access checklist.

**Steps**

1. Compare the situation you see with the matching row in the table.
2. Check the access or record condition named in that row.
3. For a completed move, read the affected Move Analysis fields as read-only and use the date
   label that matches its state.

| When you are checking… | Compare… |
|---|---|
| Lots or serial numbers | Production-lot access |
| Packages | Tracking-lot access |
| Companies | Multi-company access |
| Units | Units-of-measure access |
| Locations | Multi-location access |
| Product packaging | Stock-packaging access |
| Journal-entry information | Accounting-user access |
| Valuation or aging entries | Stock-account access and product type |
| Catch-weight variance | Catch-weight module access |
| A completed move | Whether the affected Move Analysis fields are read-only |

**Result:** You have identified the permission, module, product type, or record-state branch that
explains the report result.

If that branch does not explain the result, use [Troubleshoot report visibility](#troubleshoot-report-visibility).

## Troubleshoot report visibility

A report-visibility problem is a route, access, or data problem. Start with what appears after
you choose the report, then use the matching row below.

**Prerequisites**

- You have chosen an Inventory > Reporting destination.
- You can read the route result or message shown after the destination opens.

**Steps**

1. Select the troubleshooting row whose first-column label matches the report title.
2. Follow the action in the third column of that row.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| The route lands on `/web` with `/web#action=apps_menu` | The requested report did not open | Return to Inventory > Reporting and choose the report entry again. If the result repeats, use the access and module checks in this page. |
| The report entry is absent | A menu, role, or module condition differs from the expected report path | Compare the report with the access table, then check the relevant module and role group. |
| `There's no product move yet` | Moves History has no product move to display | Check the movement records in [Configure inventory overview and transfers](doc:admin-inventory-overview-and-transfers). |
| `No stock move found` | Move Analysis has no stock move to display | Check the movement records and the selected search conditions. |
| `There are no valuation layers. Valuation layers are created when there are product moves that impact the valuation of the stock.` | No valuation layer is available for the valuation or aging view | Check the product movement and valuation configuration before returning to the report. |

The four report walks reached `/web` and failed their report-title checks for **Moves History**,
**Move Analysis**, **Valuation**, and **CW Variance Analysis**.

**Result:** You have a next action for a wrong route, unavailable entry, empty report, or missing
valuation layer.

Use [Continue from inventory reporting](#continue-from-inventory-reporting) after you complete that
action.

## Continue from inventory reporting

After you resolve the access or route question, continue with the page that owns the next job.

The report actions and empty-state messages point back to the movement and valuation records that
feed inventory reporting. Use the report-specific access checklist before changing permissions,
then return to the relevant operational or reporting page.

**Steps**

1. Choose the next job in the table.

| If you need to… | Continue with |
|---|---|
| Use the reports as an inventory operator | [Inventory reporting](doc:inventory-reporting) |
| Review or correct movement records | [Configure inventory overview and transfers](doc:admin-inventory-overview-and-transfers) |
| Check warehouse, route, or location configuration | [Configure warehouses and replenishment](doc:admin-warehouses-and-replenishment) |
| Work with non-inventory reports or audit destinations | [Configure reports and audit work](doc:admin-reports-and-audit-work) |
| Resolve a cross-product issue | [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions) |
| Escalate an unresolved route or access problem | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) |

**Result:** You have moved to the page that owns the next inventory, reporting, or support task.

<!-- source: country-statutory-reports-and-certificates.md -->

# Country statutory reports and certificates

## Country statutory reports and certificates

Country statutory work covers country-specific reports, certificates, licenses, and SInvoice
variants in one capability. Use this page when you need to locate a country-specific statutory
surface rather than a general invoice or payment task.

| If you need to… | Go to |
| --- | --- |
| Identify the country-specific statutory area | [Find the statutory capability](#find-the-statutory-capability) |
| Prepare to use a country-specific surface | [Before you start](#before-you-start) |
| Understand the selected surface | [Understand the statutory screen](#understand-the-statutory-screen) |
| Continue with configuration | [Configure country statutory reports and certificates](doc:admin-country-statutory-reports-and-certificates) |
| Continue with electronic invoicing and local reporting | [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting) |
| Continue with audit work | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |

## Before you start

Have the country and statutory task in mind before opening the accounting area. The grouped
capability includes reports, certificates, licenses, and SInvoice variants, so the task you need
determines which entry you choose.

Use the accounting menu to look for the country-specific entry that matches your work. The
available entries are listed in the next section.

**Prerequisites**

- Know the country or statutory format related to your task.
- Know whether you need a report, certificate, license, template, symbol, or SInvoice surface.

**Steps**

1. Select the country or statutory format that matches your task.
2. Choose the matching entry from the list in [Find the statutory capability](#find-the-statutory-capability).

**Result:** You have a country or statutory format and a matching accounting entry to open in
the next section.

## Find the statutory capability

The accounting navigation groups these country-specific surfaces by country or statutory format.
Use the entry that matches the work you need to do.

| If you need to… | Accounting entry | Menu path |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Manage TicketBAI licenses | **Licenses (TicketBAI)** | `Accounting` → `Configuration` → `Spain` |
| Manage Veri*Factu certificates | **Certificates** | `Accounting` → `Configuration` → `Veri*Factu (Spain)` |
| Open the French FEC tool | **FEC** | `Accounting` → `Reporting` → `France` |
| Review French sales closings | **Sales Closings** | `Accounting` → `Reporting` → `France` |
| Create the Hungarian tax audit export | **Tax audit export - Adóhatósági Ellenőrzési Adatszolgáltatás** | `Accounting` → `Reporting` → `Hungary` |
| Work with Indonesian e-Faktur ranges | **e-Faktur** | `Accounting` → `Customers` |
| Work with Italian DDT records | **DDT** | `Accounting` → `Configuration` → `Accounting` |
| Review Argentine sales by jurisdiction | **IIBB - Sales by jurisdiction** | `Accounting` → `Reporting` → `Argentinean Statements` |
| Manage SInvoice templates | **Templates** | `Accounting` → `Configuration` → `SInvoice` |
| Manage SInvoice symbols | **Symbols** | `Accounting` → `Configuration` → `SInvoice` |

**Prerequisites**

- Have the country or statutory format identified.

**Steps**

1. Select **Accounting** to enter the accounting area.
2. Select **FEC** for the French FEC tool, or select the bold label in the Accounting entry column that names your task.

**Result:** The selected country-specific statutory surface opens for the next section.

## Understand the statutory screen

Each entry takes you to a country-specific statutory surface. Read the labels on the selected
surface before entering or changing information, and keep the country and statutory task you
identified in view while you work.

Reports and exports serve statutory reporting work. Certificates, licenses, templates, and
symbols support the corresponding electronic-document or country setup.

**Prerequisites**

- Have the selected country-specific surface open.

**Steps**

1. Read the labels on the open surface.
2. Match the surface to your task: use a report or export for reporting work, or use the
   corresponding certificate, license, template, or symbol entry for setup work.

**Result:** You are working in the statutory surface that matches your task and can perform it in
the next section.

## Perform the statutory task

Use the country-specific entry that matches your task, then follow the controls presented on that
surface. Reporting work belongs with the report or export entry; certificate, license, template,
and symbol work belongs with its corresponding setup entry.

**Prerequisites**

- Have the country-specific entry that matches your task.

**Steps**

1. Select **FEC** for the French FEC tool, or select the bold label in the Accounting entry column that names your task.
2. Follow the controls presented on that surface.

**Result:** The selected statutory task is open for the work it supports; use the next section if
the country or access branch needs correction.

## Handle country and access branches

Choose the country or statutory format first. The navigation places the available entries under
country-specific branches, including France, Hungary, Spain, Argentina, Indonesia, Italy, and
Vietnam.

| Your task is about… | Start with… |
| --- | --- |
| Spain | **Licenses (TicketBAI)** or **Certificates** |
| France | **FEC** or **Sales Closings** |
| Hungary | **Tax audit export - Adóhatósági Ellenőrzési Adatszolgáltatás** |
| Argentina | **IIBB - Sales by jurisdiction** |
| Indonesia | **e-Faktur** |
| Italy | **DDT** |
| Vietnam | **Templates** or **Symbols** |

**Prerequisites**

- Know the country or statutory format for the work.

**Steps**

1. Select **Accounting**.
2. Select **FEC** for France, or select the bold label in the Accounting entry column for your country or statutory format.

**Result:** You are in the country branch that matches the statutory task; continue to the next
section if the destination is wrong.

## When statutory work goes wrong

If the selected statutory address opens the general Apps screen instead, return to the accounting
menu and select the country-specific entry again. The statutory surface is the destination you
need; the general Apps screen is not a report, certificate, license, or SInvoice work area.

The destination screen contains theme settings rather than statutory work. Its visible controls
are Menu Style, Font Type, Preloader Option, Theme Colors, Brand Color, Background Color,
Sidebar Color, and Chatter Position; none carries a required marker.

| Destination screen detail | What it shows |
| --- | --- |
| Grid columns | None |
| Readouts | None |

| What you see | What to do |
| --- | --- |
| The general Apps screen | Select **Accounting**, then select **FEC** for France or the bold label in the Accounting entry column for your task. |
| A country branch that does not match your task | Return to the accounting menu and choose the branch named for the required country or statutory format. |

**Prerequisites**

- You can see the general Apps screen or a country branch that does not match your task.

**Steps**

1. Choose one correction from the table.

   | What you see | Action |
   | --- | --- |
   | The general Apps screen | Select **Accounting**, then select **FEC** for France or the bold label in the Accounting entry column for your task. |
   | A country branch that does not match your task | Return to the accounting menu, then select the branch for the required country or statutory format. |

**Result:** The next destination is the country-specific statutory surface for your task; continue
to the final section after it opens.

## Know what is next

After you identify the relevant country-specific surface, continue with the page that owns the
next part of the work:

- [Configure country statutory reports and certificates](doc:admin-country-statutory-reports-and-certificates)
  covers configuration and administration.
- [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting)
  covers the related electronic-invoicing work.
- [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) covers the related audit work.

**Prerequisites**

- Know whether your next task is configuration, electronic invoicing, or audit work.

**Steps**

1. Select the follow-on page that matches your next task.
2. Continue with that page's instructions.

**Result:** You have moved to the page for the next part of your statutory work.

<!-- source: payments-providers-and-reconciliation.md -->

# Payments, providers, and reconciliation

## Payments, providers, and reconciliation

Payment setup records control how online payment methods are offered, how payment activity is
recorded, and how bank transactions are matched. **Payment Providers** connect payment services;
**Payment Methods** describe the methods available through those providers; **Payment Tokens** keep
reusable payment details; and **Payment Transactions** record individual payment activity.
**Reconciliation Models** define matching and counterpart rules for bank transactions. **EDI Proxy
Users** hold the connection details used by electronic data interchange (EDI) services.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Find an online payment provider or enable its methods | [Find the payment setup record](#find-the-payment-setup-record) |
| Review payment methods, tokens, or transactions | [Understand the payment setup screens](#understand-the-payment-setup-screens) |
| Configure an online payment surface | [Configure online payment surfaces](#configure-online-payment-surfaces) |
| Set matching rules for bank transactions | [Configure reconciliation rules and review EDI users](#configure-reconciliation-rules-and-review-edi-users) |
| Choose a rule-specific field or action | [Handle conditional fields and actions](#handle-conditional-fields-and-actions) |
| Diagnose a route, warning, empty screen, or session message | [When the setup screen does not open](#when-the-setup-screen-does-not-open) |
| Continue with operational payment work | [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups) |
| Continue with bank activity and journals | [Accounting journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) |
| Continue with electronic invoicing | [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting) |

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- You can open the relevant Accounting configuration entry.
- You know whether you need a provider, payment method, token, transaction, reconciliation model,
  or EDI proxy user.
- You know that some screens are read-only. Account payment methods cannot be created, edited, or
  deleted. Provider creation is disabled in the list and kanban views. Payment tokens and payment
  transactions cannot be created or edited from their forms, and their lists do not offer creation.
  EDI Proxy Users cannot be created, deleted, or edited from the list.
- Access restrictions apply to the **Payment Tokens** and **Payment Methods** entries.

## Find the payment setup record

Use this procedure to reach a setup list or kanban view, then open an existing record when you need
its form.

**Prerequisites**

- You know which setup record you need.
- You have access to Accounting configuration.

**Steps**

1. Open **Accounting**.
2. Open **Configuration**.
3. Select the entry that matches your task.

   | If you need to work with… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Payment service connections | **Payment Providers** under **Online Payments** |
   | Methods offered by payment providers | **Payment Methods** under **Online Payments** |
   | Stored payment details | **Payment Tokens** under **Online Payments** |
   | Individual online payment records | **Payment Transactions** under **Online Payments** |
   | Bank matching rules | **Reconciliation Models** under **Banks** |
   | Electronic data interchange connections | **EDI Proxy Users** |

4. Select the record you want to inspect.

**Result:** The selected list, kanban view, or record form is on screen.

## Understand the payment setup screens

Each setup surface represents a different kind of payment or accounting record. Use the field group
that matches the surface you opened rather than expecting every field on every screen.

| Surface | Main areas and fields |
|---|---|
| **Payment Providers** | Name, State, Company, Payment Methods, Enable Payment Methods, Allow Tokenization, Capture Manually, Allow Express Checkout, Maximum Amount, Credentials, Configuration, Payment Form, Availability, and Messages |
| **Payment Methods** | **Name**, **Payment Type**, **Code**, and **Payment Method** on the account payment-method surface |
| **Payment Methods** | **Name**, **Active**, **Providers**, **Brands**, **Configuration**, and **Supported by** on the online payment-method surface |
| Payment Tokens | Payment Details, Payment Method, Partner, Provider, Provider Reference, Company, Payments, and Archived |
| Payment Transactions | Reference, Amount, Payment Method, Provider, Provider Reference, Token, Date Created, Last State Change, Address, City, State, ZIP, Country, Email, Phone, Language, Child transactions, Message, **Capture Transaction**, **Void Transaction**, and **Refunds** |
| **Reconciliation Models** | **Model Name**, **Rule Type**, **Auto Reconcile**, **To Check**, **Past Months Limit**, **Matching Order**, **Bank Transactions Conditions**, **Match Journals**, **Match Nature**, **Match Amount**, **Allow Payment Tolerance**, **Match Invoice/bill with**, **Label**, **Note**, **Reference**, **Match Label**, **Match Note**, **Match Transaction Type**, **Match Partner**, **Partner Mapping**, **Counterpart Entries**, and **Journal Entries** |
| **EDI Proxy Users** | **Proxy Type**, **EDI Mode**, **Client ID**, **EDI Identification**, **Private Key**, and **Refresh Token** |

The **Payment Providers** form groups service credentials and payment-form behavior under
**Configuration**, availability limits under **Availability**, and customer-facing text under
**Messages**. The online **Payment Methods** form separates provider relationships under
**Providers**, primary-method brands under **Brands**, and restricted behavior settings under
**Configuration**. A token's **Payments** action opens the transactions linked to that token.

The transaction form keeps **Child transactions** and **Message** below the transaction details.
The **Refunds** action appears only when the transaction has refunds to show. The reconciliation
form puts matching choices in **Bank Transactions Conditions**, counterpart lines in **Counterpart
Entries**, and rule-specific partner mappings in **Partner Mapping**.

## Configure online payment surfaces

Use this procedure to configure an available provider and its payment methods, or to review the
token and transaction records connected to online payments.

**Prerequisites**

- You are on a **Payment Providers** or **Payment Methods** form when you need to change setup.
- You are on a saved **Payment Tokens** or **Payment Transactions** record when you need to review
  linked activity.
- For a transaction action, the transaction is authorized.

**Steps**

1. In **Payment Providers**, choose the action that matches your task.

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Change the provider's publication state | **Published** or **Unpublished** |
   | Install the provider module | **Install** |
   | Open the provider pricing page for an upgrade | **Upgrade** |

2. In the provider's **Payment Form** area, select **Enable Payment Methods** to open payment-method
   configuration.
3. In the provider's **Configuration** area, set **Allow Tokenization**, **Capture Manually**, or
   **Allow Express Checkout** when that option is available.
4. In the **Availability** area, set **Maximum Amount** and choose the allowed currencies and
   countries when those fields are available.
5. In **Payment Tokens**, select **Payments** to open the transactions linked to the token.
6. Select **Capture Transaction** on an authorized transaction.
7. In an authorized **Payment Transactions** record, select **Void Transaction**.

   > **Caution:** Voiding an authorized transaction cannot be undone.

   The confirmation text is `Are you sure you want to void the authorized transaction? This action can't be undone.`

8. In **Payment Transactions**, select **Refunds** when the transaction has refunds to show.

**Result:** The selected configuration or linked transaction view is on screen.

## Configure reconciliation rules and review EDI users

A reconciliation model is a reusable set of conditions for matching bank transactions and creating
counterpart entries. An EDI proxy user is the saved connection identity that the EDI service uses.

**Prerequisites**

- You are on a **Reconciliation Models** form to change a rule.
- You are on the **EDI Proxy Users** list to review an EDI connection.

**Steps**

1. In **Reconciliation Models**, enter the model's **Model Name**.
2. Select the **Rule Type** that matches the reconciliation work.
3. In **Bank Transactions Conditions**, set the journals, nature, amount, payment tolerance, invoice
   text locations, label, note, transaction type, and partner matching choices that apply.
4. In **Counterpart Entries**, enter the account, amount, tax, analytic distribution, journal, and
   label information for the resulting entries.
5. If the selected rule type offers **Partner Mapping**, enter the payment-reference or narration
   pattern and the partner it identifies.
6. Select **Journal Entries** to open the journal entries associated with the reconciliation model.
7. In **EDI Proxy Users**, review **Proxy Type**, **EDI Mode**, **Client ID**, **EDI Identification**,
   **Private Key**, and **Refresh Token**.

**Result:** The reconciliation rule fields or EDI proxy identity fields are on screen, and
**Journal Entries** opens the entries associated with the model.

## Handle conditional fields and actions

Provider state, payment support, and reconciliation choices change which fields and actions appear.
Use the following decision table before looking for a field or selecting an action.

| If… | Then… |
|---|---|
| The provider module is not installed | Provider status controls and the provider image are hidden or read-only. |
| The provider is disabled | Payment methods and payment-form options are hidden. |
| The company requires a currency and the provider is active | The available-currency field is required. |
| Support is disabled for tokenization, manual capture, or express checkout | The matching option is hidden. |
| The payment method is not primary | **Brands** is hidden. |
| **Rule Type** is invoice matching | Invoice-matching controls and **Partner Mapping** are available. |
| **Rule Type** is a write-off button | **Auto Reconcile** and several matching controls are hidden; **To Check** is shown. |
| **Match Amount** has a value | The minimum and maximum amount controls become available according to the selected amount rule. |
| **Match Partner** is selected | Partner and partner-category controls become available. |
| The transaction state is authorized | **Capture Transaction** and **Void Transaction** are shown. |
| The transaction has no refunds | **Refunds** is hidden. |
| The transaction has no state message | The **Message** area is hidden. |

**Prerequisites**

- You know the provider state, payment-method status, rule type, or transaction state you need to
  inspect.

**Steps**

1. Select the record state or rule option that matches your task.
2. Read the fields and actions that appear for that choice.
3. Use the matching row in the decision table to choose the next field or action.

**Result:** The form shows the fields and actions for the selected provider, payment method,
reconciliation rule, or transaction state.

## When the setup screen does not open

Use this table when a setup screen shows a warning, an empty state, a different page, or a session
message.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| `Warning Creating a payment provider from the CREATE button is not supported. Please use the Duplicate action instead.` | Provider creation from **CREATE** is not supported. | Use the **Duplicate** action instead. |
| `These properties are set to match the behavior of providers and that of their integration with Sherkety regarding this payment method. Any change may result in errors and should be tested on a test database first.` | The payment-method configuration can affect provider integration behavior. | Test the change on a test database first. |
| `Create a new payment provider` | The provider list has no provider record to open. | Use the provider creation route supported by your setup. |
| `No payment methods found for your payment providers.` | No payment method is available for the providers. | Configure a payment provider. |
| `There is no token created yet.` | No payment token exists to open. | Continue with a payment flow that creates a token. |
| `There are no transactions to show` | No payment transaction is available in the list. | Open a payment token or payment flow that has linked activity. |
| **Theme Customizer** appears at `/web#action=apps_menu` | The requested setup route landed on the app shell instead of the setup screen. | Return to **Accounting** and use the configuration entry for the required record. |
| An empty screen appears for **EDI Proxy Users** or **Payment Providers** | The requested screen has no visible controls or buttons. | Return to the configuration menu and reopen the required entry. |
| `Session Expired` appears | The transaction screen is showing a session-expiry page. | Return to the sign-in screen and open the transaction route again. |

When **Theme Customizer** appears, the visible customization controls are:

| Area | Controls |
|---|---|
| Menu and font | **Menu Style**, **Font Type**, and **Chatter Position** |
| Loading and theme | **Preloader Option**, **Theme Colors**, and **Dark Mode** |
| Colors | **Brand Color**, **Background Color**, and **Sidebar Color** |
| Actions | **Save** and **Reset To Default** |

## Continue with the accounting workflow

After you finish payment setup, use the related page that matches the next job:

| Next job | Page |
|---|---|
| Work with operational payments and follow-ups | [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups) |
| Continue with journals and bank activity | [Accounting journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) |
| Continue with electronic invoicing and local reporting | [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting) |

If you selected **Enable Payment Methods**, continue in the payment-method configuration surface
and review the method's **Providers**, **Brands**, and **Configuration** areas. If you selected
**Journal Entries**, continue from the entries associated with the reconciliation model.

**Result:** You have a next page or accounting surface for the operational, banking, or statutory
work that follows payment setup.

<!-- source: personalizing-your-workspace.md -->

# Personalizing your workspace

## Personalize your workspace

Workspace personalization is the set of choices that changes how the application looks while
you work. Choose the menu, font, preloader, theme, colour, and chatter options, then select an
available action.

| If you need to… | Go to |
| --- | --- |
| Identify the available appearance choices | [Workspace options on screen](#workspace-options-on-screen) |
| Choose appearance options and select an available action | [Choose appearance options and select an action](#choose-appearance-options-and-select-an-action) |
| Open personal settings or security actions | [Use personal preferences and account security](#use-personal-preferences-and-account-security) |
| Orient yourself in the application | [Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface) |

The workspace options include **Menu Style**, **Font Type**, **Preloader Option**, **Theme
Colors**, **Brand Color**, **Background Color**, **Sidebar Color**, and **Chatter Position**.

## Before you start

You need a signed-in session before opening workspace options. Some personal settings depend on
your access and on what is already configured for your account.

| Before you start | What changes |
| --- | --- |
| System access | **Add a language** is available only to users with the required system access. |
| Existing API keys | The API-key list appears when your account has API keys. |
| Personal settings | Language is required on the personal form. |
| Security actions | Password and device actions open their own confirmation forms. |

## Open the workspace options

The workspace options are the appearance controls on the `/web` page. Open that page before
choosing a menu style, font, preloader, colour, or chatter position.

**Prerequisites**

- You are signed in.

**Steps**

1. Open `/web`.
2. Locate the workspace options on the page.
3. Continue to [Workspace options on screen](#workspace-options-on-screen).

![Identify the workspace appearance controls on the `/web` page.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/eb57f33f6aca9942371d90bc6819aa78.png)

**Result:** The workspace options page is open.

## Workspace options on screen

Each option controls one part of the workspace appearance. Use the visible label to find the
choice you want to change.

| What you want to adjust | Select |
| --- | --- |
| The application menu presentation | **Menu Style** |
| The typeface used by the application | **Font Type** |
| The loading-screen presentation | **Preloader Option** |
| The overall theme colour set | **Theme Colors** |
| The brand colour | **Brand Color** |
| The page background colour | **Background Color** |
| The sidebar colour | **Sidebar Color** |
| The chatter location | **Chatter Position** |

## Choose appearance options and select an action

Choose the appearance options you need before selecting an available action.

**Prerequisites**

- The workspace options page is open.

**Steps**

1. Select **Menu Style**, **Font Type**, **Preloader Option**, **Theme Colors**, **Brand Color**, **Background Color**, **Sidebar Color**, or **Chatter Position**.
2. Choose the value you want from that option.
3. Select another control from the table and choose its value when you want to adjust another appearance choice.
4. Choose one action:

   | If you want to… | Select |
   | --- | --- |
   | Apply the save action | **Save** |
   | Use the reset action | **Reset To Default** |

**Result:** **Save** and **Reset To Default** are listed controls.

### Save appearance options

**Steps**

1. Select **Save**.

The save action reloads the application context after it completes.

**Result:** The application reloads its context.

## Use personal preferences and account security

Personal preferences contain account details and communication settings. Account security contains
password and device actions.

| If you want to… | Select |
| --- | --- |
| Work with personal settings | **Preferences** |
| Open password and device actions | **Account Security** |

### Personal preferences

**Prerequisites**

- The parent settings surface is open.

**Steps**

1. Select **Preferences**.

**Result:** The personal-preferences surface opens.

### Account security

**Prerequisites**

- The parent settings surface is open.

**Steps**

1. Select **Account Security**.

**Result:** The account-security actions open.

### Change your password

**Prerequisites**

- The account-security actions are open.

**Steps**

1. Select **Change password**.

The password form is titled `Change Password`.

**Result:** The `Change Password` form is open.

### Manage signed-in devices

**Prerequisites**

- The account-security actions are open.

**Steps**

1. Select **Log out from all devices**.

The device form is titled `Log out from all devices`. It says `You are about to log out from all devices that currently have access to your account.` and `Type in your password to confirm :`. The password confirmation form says `Please enter your password to confirm you own this account` and provides `Forgot password?`.

**Result:** The `Log out from all devices` form is open.

## If Preferences does not open

If **Preferences** does not open, stop at the page you reached and do not continue with the
personal-preferences steps.

| What you see | What to do |
| --- | --- |
| **Preferences** does not open | Stop and remain on the page you reached. |
| The workspace controls are visible | Use **Menu Style**, **Font Type**, **Preloader Option**, **Theme Colors**, **Brand Color**, **Background Color**, **Sidebar Color**, or **Chatter Position**. |
| The password dialog is open | Use **Change Password**. |
| The device dialog is open | Use **Log out from all devices**. |

## What to do next

After you select **Save**, the application reloads its context. For a broader orientation, read
[Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface).

<!-- source: system-requirements.md -->

# System requirements

Before deploying Sherkety ERP, check the container, database, network, and service
requirements, then test the database connection.

## System requirements

The image starts from Ubuntu 22.04 and the deployment uses Flectra 3.0 with an
external PostgreSQL database. Check the environment before startup, then check
connectivity after startup.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Check software, database, and network prerequisites | [Before you start](#before-you-start) |
| Choose between deployment environments | [Choose the deployment path](#choose-the-deployment-path) |
| Configure values, mounts, ports, and startup | [Configure and start the deployment](#configure-and-start-the-deployment) |
| Select connection and security settings | [Choose connection and security options](#choose-connection-and-security-options) |
| Test PostgreSQL access or diagnose startup | [Test the connection and troubleshoot startup](#test-the-connection-and-troubleshoot-startup) |
| Confirm deployment readiness | [Confirm deployment readiness](#confirm-deployment-readiness) |

## Before you start

The deployment prerequisites are the software and access needed to run the container
and reach its external database.

| Requirement | What to have ready |
|---|---|
| Container base | The deployment image uses Ubuntu 22.04. |
| Python | Use Python 3.11 for Flectra 3.0 compatibility. |
| Database | An Azure VM has PostgreSQL installed and running. |
| PostgreSQL | Use PostgreSQL 14 or later as the recommended version. |
| Docker | Use Docker 20.10 or later for local development. |
| Docker Compose | Use Docker Compose 2.0 or later for local development. |
| Database access | Have access to the Azure VM PostgreSQL database. |
| Network access | Allow connections from the local development machine, Rancher/Kubernetes cluster IP ranges, and the Docker host network. |

## Choose the deployment path

Choose the path that matches where you are running the service. Local development uses
Docker Compose; the staging and production environments use an Azure VM
PostgreSQL database.

| If you need to… | Use this path |
|---|---|
| Run local development | Use the Docker Compose instructions and the `.env` file. |
| Run staging | Use the Azure VM database with the staging configuration. |
| Run production | Use the Azure VM database with the production configuration and subdomain routing. |

The database remains outside the container in the Azure deployment. The
container keeps Flectra data and sessions in its mounted data location.

## Configure and start the deployment

Begin after Docker, Docker Compose, and database access are ready.

Prerequisites

- You have Docker 20.10 or later.
- You have Docker Compose 2.0 or later.
- PostgreSQL is running on the Azure VM.
- The database accepts connections from the machine or cluster that runs the service.

Steps

1. Open a shell in the Flectra directory.
2. Create the environment file from `.env.example`.

   ```bash
   cp .env.example .env
   ```

3. Set the database host, database port, database user, database password, and
   deployment environment in `.env`.

| Setting | Value or meaning |
   |---|---|
| `DB_HOST` | Azure VM PostgreSQL host, or `localhost` for local development |
| `DB_PORT` | `5432` |
| `DB_USER` | Account used to connect |
| `DB_PASSWORD` | Password for the connection |
| `ENVIRONMENT` | `development` |

4. Start the service with the environment file.

   ```bash
   docker-compose --env-file .env up -d
   ```

5. Check the service logs.

   ```bash
   docker-compose logs -f flectra
   ```

6. Confirm that the service health check requests `/web` on port `8069`.

**Result:** The container starts with the data, custom-addon,
configuration, and log mounts. The image exposes HTTP on port `8069`, long polling on
port `8072`, and XMLRPC/API on port `8073`; Compose maps the web and long-polling
ports by default. Continue with the connection and security choices before exposing
the service beyond local development.

## Choose connection and security options

Choose the connection and security settings before exposing the service beyond local
development.

| If you need to… | Set in `.env`, PostgreSQL access rules, or network configuration |
|---|---|
| Connect to the Azure database | Set the database host in `.env` and allow the required source addresses in PostgreSQL access rules. |
| Permit local development | Allow the development machine's address to connect to PostgreSQL. |
| Permit Kubernetes or Rancher | Allow the cluster address range to connect to PostgreSQL. |
| Protect production traffic | Enable SSL/TLS and use a connection string that requires SSL. |
| Restrict database access | Use specific addresses in `pg_hba.conf` instead of broad ranges. |
| Expose the API | Confirm whether the XMLRPC/API service on port `8073` is required before opening it. |

Use strong passwords. Restrict database access. Enable SSL/TLS for production. Schedule
automated backups. The container exposes port `8073`, while the Compose service maps the
web and long-polling ports only; confirm the API exposure decision for the deployment.

**Result:** The database connection path and the security settings match the intended
deployment environment. Run the connection test next.

## Test the connection and troubleshoot startup

Run the connection test after configuring the database host, user, and database.

Prerequisites

- You know the Azure VM host name or address.
- PostgreSQL is running.
- The database user has permission to connect.

Steps

1. Open a shell on the local machine.
2. Enter `psql -h <azure-vm-ip> -U <database-user> -d <database-name> -c "\l"` and press Enter.
3. Confirm that the command lists the databases.
4. If the container does not start, inspect the Flectra logs.

   ```bash
   docker-compose logs -f flectra
   ```

5. If the connection fails, use the symptom in the table to choose the checks to perform.

   | If you see… | Check… |
   |---|---|
   | `could not connect to server: Connection refused` | PostgreSQL status, port `5432`, network security group rules, and `listen_addresses` |
   | Authentication fails for the database user | The `.env` password, the `pg_hba.conf` authentication method, and the database user |
   | `FATAL: no pg_hba.conf entry for host` | The client address in `pg_hba.conf`, then reload PostgreSQL |
   | `FATAL: SSL connection is required` | The production SSL configuration and the connection string's SSL mode |

Resolve the URL conflict before giving an access address to readers: one access URL is
`http://localhost:7071`, while the image and Compose configuration use port `8069`.

**Result:** The PostgreSQL command lists the available databases, or the displayed
failure identifies the database or network setting to correct. Complete the readiness
checks before treating the environment as ready.

## Confirm deployment readiness

Before treating the environment as ready, complete these deployment checks.

| Readiness action | How to complete it |
|---|---|
| Confirm the host platform | Confirm that the host operating system and architecture support the container deployment. |
| Confirm capacity | Set CPU, memory, storage, and database capacity for the intended workload. |
| Confirm client access | Confirm the supported browsers and display requirements for the web interface. |
| Confirm network access | Confirm firewall, proxy, DNS, outbound, and PostgreSQL source-network rules. |
| Confirm the PostgreSQL version | Confirm whether PostgreSQL 14 is the required minimum for the deployment. |
| Confirm API exposure | Confirm whether port `8073` must be reachable, then apply the network rule. |
| Confirm recovery settings | Set backup retention and recovery targets for the deployment. |
| Confirm production security | Set the SSL/TLS enforcement and certificate policy. |
| Confirm distribution scope | Confirm whether the configuration is for internal operations before sharing it. |

**Result:** The deployment owner has completed the readiness checks before the service
is treated as ready.

<!-- source: warehouses-and-replenishment.md -->

# Warehouses and replenishment

Use this page to configure the warehouse structure, the rules that direct stock through locations,
putaway destinations, replenishment thresholds, storage capacity, and GİB plate records.

## Warehouses and replenishment

Warehouse configuration defines where stock is held and how it moves. Replenishment configuration
sets the quantities and actions used to restore stock. Together, these settings support the
operational work in Inventory that follows setup.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Set warehouse locations, routes, rules, or operation types | [Configure the warehouse flow](#configure-the-warehouse-flow) |
| Direct arriving products to storage and set replenishment quantities | [Configure putaway and replenishment](#configure-putaway-and-replenishment) |
| Set capacity limits or maintain plate records | [Configure storage capacity and GİB plate numbers](#configure-storage-capacity-and-gib-plate-numbers) |
| Choose fields that appear only for a particular setup | [Handle configuration branches](#handle-configuration-branches) |
| Continue with stock movement work | [Inventory transfers and returns](doc:inventory-transfers-and-returns) |
| Review the inventory entry point | [Inventory overview](doc:inventory-overview) |
| Configure products and packages used by these rules | [Products, packages and delivery](doc:products-packages-and-delivery) |
| Review the resulting inventory information | [Inventory reporting](doc:inventory-reporting) |
| Administer this configuration area | [Configure warehouses and replenishment](doc:admin-warehouses-and-replenishment) |

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- You have access to the Inventory configuration entries for the records you need to maintain.
- You know which warehouses, locations, routes, rules, operation types, storage categories,
  putaway rules, reordering rules, and plate records your company needs.
- You know which company, warehouse, location, product, and package choices belong in each record.
- You know whether advanced location, multiple-warehouse, storage-category, or tracking-lot
  access applies to the work.

The available fields depend on the selected usage, operation code, company, warehouse, and access
groups. A field can be mandatory only when the relevant configuration makes it applicable. Check
the condition beside each field before entering a value.

The configuration screens have conditional rules for source and destination locations, cyclic
counting, storage capacity rows, rule locations, and operation-type locations. Access groups also
control warehouse configuration, technical warehouse information, multiple locations, advanced
locations, and storage categories.

## Find a configuration record

**Steps**

1. Open **Inventory**.

   

2. Open **Configuration**.
3. Open the configuration area that matches your task.

| If you need to… | Open |
|---|---|
| Maintain warehouse structure | **Warehouse Management** |
| Maintain GİB plate records | **GİB e-Dispatch**, then **GİB Plate Numbers** |
| Maintain replenishment thresholds | **Products**, then **Reordering Rules** |
| Maintain locations, routes, rules, operation types, putaway rules, or storage categories | The corresponding entry under **Warehouse Management** |

4. Select an existing record to open it.

**Result:** The selected configuration list or record is open for the next task.

## Understand the configuration screens

Each configuration surface is a list or form for one part of the warehouse flow. The available
forms group identity, locations, rules, quantities, capacity, and plate information; the lists
provide filters, groupings, and related actions.

## Configure the warehouse flow

A warehouse is the top-level stock structure. Locations identify where stock is held, routes and
rules direct movement between locations, and operation types describe the handling operation.

**Prerequisites**

- You have decided the warehouse, location, company, route, rule, and operation-type structure.
- You know the source and destination locations for each movement.

**Steps**

1. Open the warehouse configuration list.
2. Open an existing warehouse record.
3. Enter the warehouse identity, company, partner, reception, delivery, and resupply values.
4. Set the warehouse's location values for stock, input, quality, packing, and output where those
   fields are available.
5. Open the location configuration list.
6. Enter the location name, parent location, usage, company, and location options.
7. Open the route configuration list.
8. Set the route applicability choices for product categories, products, packagings, and
   warehouses.
9. Enter each route rule's sequence, action, source location, and destination location.
10. Open the rule configuration list.
11. Enter the rule action, picking type, source and destination locations, automatic behaviour,
    procurement method, route, warehouse, propagation choices, and delay.
12. Open the operation-type configuration list.
13. Set the operation type's code, warehouse, reservation method, return settings, backorder
    setting, default locations, lot handling, package handling, and print choices.

Use these controls when they appear on the relevant lists or forms:

| Configuration work | Available controls |
|---|---|
| Warehouse list | **Routes**, **Archived** |
| Location list | **Putaway Rules**, **Current Stock**, **Archived**, **Internal**, **Customer**, **Production**, **Vendor** |
| Route form | **Product Categories**, **Products**, **Packagings** |
| Rule list | **Archived**, **Route**, **Warehouse** |

**Result:** The warehouse-flow records contain the structure and movement choices needed by the
configured operation types.

## Configure putaway and replenishment

A putaway rule directs arriving stock to a storage destination. A reordering rule sets the stock
levels and actions that prompt replenishment work.

**Prerequisites**

- The warehouse and locations used by the rule exist.
- You know the product, category, package type, destination, minimum quantity, maximum quantity,
  and quantity multiple for the rule.

**Steps**

1. Open **Putaway Rules**.
2. Use **Filters** to narrow the list when needed.
3. Use **Group By** to group the list when needed.
4. Enter the arrival location, product or category, package types, storage destination, storage
   category, and company values.
5. Open **Reordering Rules**.
6. Enter the product, location, warehouse, route, trigger, group, minimum quantity, maximum
   quantity, quantity multiple, and company values.
7. Review the on-hand quantity, forecast quantity, visibility days, quantity to order, and unit
   information.
8. Choose the replenishment action you need.

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Review the forecast | **Forecast Report** |
   | Review replenishment details | **Replenishment Information** |
   | Place one order | **Order Once** |
   | Automate the action | **Automate** |
   | Defer the action | **Snooze** |

**Result:** The putaway rule directs arriving stock to its configured destination, and the
reordering rule holds the thresholds and replenishment action for the selected product and
location.

## Configure storage capacity and GİB plate numbers

A storage category groups capacity settings for locations. A GİB plate number record identifies a
plate used by GİB e-Dispatch.

**Prerequisites**

- You know the maximum weight and unit for each storage category.
- You know whether the capacity applies to a package type or a product.
- You have the plate type and plate number information required for GİB e-Dispatch.

**Steps**

1. Open **Storage Categories**.
2. Enter the category name, capacity option, maximum weight, unit, and company values.
3. Choose the capacity type.

   | If capacity applies to… | Enter |
   |---|---|
   | A package type | The package-capacity values |
   | A product | The product-capacity values |

4. Select **Locations** to move from the storage category to its related locations when that
   action is available.
5. Open **GİB Plate Numbers**.
6. Enter the plate type and plate number.

Package capacity depends on the applicable tracking-lot access. Product capacity is listed
separately from package capacity.

**Result:** Storage capacity records and GİB plate-number records contain the values needed by
their related Inventory and e-Dispatch work.

## Handle configuration branches

Configuration branches determine which choices and fields apply to the record you are creating or
editing. The branch can depend on the access group, location usage, company, operation code, route
choice, or warehouse choice.

> **Note:** Your access and company configuration determine which choices appear on a form.

| When this applies | What changes |
|---|---|
| Advanced location or multiple-warehouse access applies | Warehouse configuration choices are available. |
| A location uses internal or transit usage and has a company | Cyclic inventory fields can appear. |
| A location uses internal usage and the storage-category access applies | Storage-category choices can appear. |
| A rule uses pull, push, or pull-and-push action | Source-location choices can appear. |
| An operation type uses an internal, outgoing, or incoming code | The applicable source, destination, hardware, and print choices can appear. |
| A route allows warehouse selection | Warehouse choices can appear on the route. |
| A capacity row is subject to its access condition | Its required state depends on the applicable configuration. |

**Steps**

1. Select the company and usage values that match the stock location.
2. Select the operation code that matches the operation type.
3. Review the fields that appear after the selection.
4. Complete fields that the selected branch makes mandatory.

**Result:** The form shows the choices applicable to the selected company, usage, operation code,
access, and warehouse configuration.

## When configuration does not work

Use the symptom, meaning, and action below when a configuration task stops.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| A field or action does not appear. | Its company, usage, operation code, access group, or warehouse condition may not apply. | Review the branch rules in [Handle configuration branches](#handle-configuration-branches). |
| A required combination is refused. | The selected rule, operation code, capacity condition, or location condition requires a related value. | Review the applicable source and destination, operation, or capacity choices before saving. |
| The form has no validation, confirmation, or error text for the action. | No message is available to guide the next move. | Check the required combination and the applicable access and branch conditions before trying again. |

### Messages

The Help message reads: "Define a new warehouse".
Help message: "Define a new warehouse".

| Class | Message |
|---|---|
| Help | `Define a minimum stock rule so that Flectra automatically creates requests for quotations or confirmed manufacturing orders to resupply your stock.` |

## What to do next

After the warehouse structure, movement rules, storage destinations, replenishment rules, and
plate records are configured, continue with the Inventory work that uses those settings.

| Next need | Continue with |
|---|---|
| Review the Inventory entry point | [Inventory overview](doc:inventory-overview) |
| Process receipts, deliveries, transfers, or returns | [Inventory transfers and returns](doc:inventory-transfers-and-returns) |
| Complete product and package setup | [Products, packages and delivery](doc:products-packages-and-delivery) |
| Review movement, valuation, or stock information | [Inventory reporting](doc:inventory-reporting) |
| Restrict or troubleshoot configuration access | [Configure warehouses and replenishment](doc:admin-warehouses-and-replenishment) |

This configuration page has no lifecycle stages or transitions. Continue with the
Inventory page that matches the work you need to perform.

<!-- source: basic-terminology.md -->

# Basic terminology

## Accounting Dashboard terms

The Accounting Dashboard is the screen where accounting journal cards present the work available
for each journal type.

**Customer** identifies customer work, and **Invoices** identifies invoice work.

| If you need to… | Go to |
| --- | --- |
| Understand the Accounting Dashboard terms | [Accounting Dashboard terms](#accounting-dashboard-terms) |
| Prepare to open the screen | [Before you start](#before-you-start) |
| Open the screen and recognize it | [Open and recognize the Dashboard](#open-and-recognize-the-dashboard) |
| Choose work from a journal card | [Choose a journal action](#choose-a-journal-action) |
| Resolve a Dashboard mismatch | [When the Dashboard does not match](#when-the-dashboard-does-not-match) |
| Continue journal or invoice work | [Accounting journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) or [Customers, products, and invoices](doc:customers-products-and-invoices) |

## Before you start

The Dashboard for these terms is reached from **Accounting**.

The destination is labeled **Dashboard** under **Accounting**.

**Prerequisites**

- You can open **Accounting**.

## Open and recognize the Dashboard

Use this procedure to reach the Dashboard from the application menu and identify the landing
screen.

**Steps**

1. Open **Accounting**.
2. Select **Dashboard**.
3. Confirm that the **Accounting Dashboard** heading is visible.

**Result:** The **Dashboard** is open, with the **Accounting Periods**, **Bank Account**,
**Taxes**, and **Chart of Accounts** cards available on the screen.

## Choose a journal action

A journal card presents actions and readouts together.

**Prerequisites**

- The Dashboard is open.

**Steps**

1. Select the action that matches the work you need to perform.

   | If you need to… | Select or read… |
   | --- | --- |
   | Create an invoice | **New Invoice** |
   | Upload or enter a bill | **Upload** or **Create Manually** |
   | Connect an account | **Connect** |
   | Start a transaction | **New Transaction** |
   | Create an entry | **New Entry** |
   | Review a sequence gap | **Gaps in the sequence** |
   | Read account activity | **Balance**, **Last Statement**, or **Misc. Operations** |

The Dashboard can also show **Gaps in the sequence**, **Balance**, **Last Statement**, and
**Misc. Operations** for a journal card.

**Result:** The Dashboard shows the available action labels and readouts for the work on screen.

## When the Dashboard does not match

If the Dashboard does not open from a direct link, use the menu path instead.

1. Open **Accounting**.
2. Select **Dashboard**.

**Result:** The Dashboard is open after selecting **Dashboard** from **Accounting**.

<!-- source: budgets-assets-and-analytic-accounting.md -->

# Budgets and analytic accounting

## Budgets and analytic accounting

Analytic accounting classifies budget lines through analytic accounts; budgets record periods,
responsible people, companies, and budget lines.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Prepare account classifications for a budget | [Set up analytic accounting and budgetary positions](#set-up-analytic-accounting-and-budgetary-positions) |
| Create or advance a budget | [Create and progress a budget](#create-and-progress-a-budget) |
| Read budget amounts or open detail entries | [Review budget lines and open entries](#review-budget-lines-and-open-entries) |
| Correct a blocked budget action | [Budget validation messages](#budget-validation-messages) |
| Continue with journal or reporting work | [Accounting journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) or [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

Have the budgetary-position information and the budget-line information ready. A budgetary position
contains the accounts used by the budget, while a budget line contains its classification, period,
and amounts.

An analytic account identifies the analytic classification used by a budget line. Access to analytic
accounting controls whether **Analytic Account** is available on a budget line.
Multi-company access controls whether **Company** is included on the budget and its lines.

**Result:** The records, account access, and company access needed for the next task are clear.

## Find an analytic or budget record

An analytic record organizes accounting activity by an analytic classification, while a budget
records planned and compared amounts for a defined period. Use the Accounting destinations to open
an existing record or to start a new record from its list.

The covered destinations are **Analytic Items**, **Analytic Distribution Models**, **Analytic
Accounts**, **Analytic Plans**, **Cash Roundings**, **Budgetary Positions**, and **Budgets**.

**Prerequisites**

- You have access to the Accounting area.
- You know whether you are opening an existing record or starting a new one.

**Steps**

1. Open the Accounting destination for the record you need.
2. Choose the route that matches your task.

| If you need to… | Choose… |
|---|---|
| Review a saved record | The existing record in the destination list |
| Start a record | The destination's new-record option |

**Result:** The selected Accounting destination or record is open.

## Set up analytic accounting and budgetary positions

Use the budgetary position's accounts and, where needed, an analytic account to classify a budget
line.

**Prerequisites**

- You have the accounts that belong to the budgetary position.
- Your access includes analytic accounting if the budget line needs an **Analytic Account**.

**Steps**

1. Add the accounts in **Accounts**.
2. Select an **Analytic Account** on the budget line when analytic accounting is part of the classification.

**Result:** The budgetary-position accounts are ready for use in budget lines.

## Create and progress a budget

A budget records a named period, its responsible person and company, and the lines used to compare
planned, practical, and theoretical amounts.

**Prerequisites**

- The budgetary position and any analytic account needed by the lines are ready.
- The budget is at the stage where its identity, responsible person, dates, company, and lines are editable.

**Steps**

1. Enter the budget name in **Budget Name**.
2. Select the responsible person in **Responsible**.
3. Set the budget period using **Period**.
4. Select **Company** when your access includes multiple companies.
5. Add each budget line in **Budget Lines**.
6. Select the next stage action in order.

| Order | Select… |
|---|---|
| First | **Confirm** |
| Second | **Approve** |
| Third | **Done** |

**Result:** The budget advances through the available stage actions.

Use the alternative stage actions when the budget needs a different outcome:

| If you need to… | Select… |
|---|---|
| Return the budget to its draft stage | **Reset to Draft** |
| Cancel the budget | **Cancel Budget** |

**Result:** The budget is either advanced, returned to its draft stage, or cancelled.

## Review budget lines and open entries

A budget line is the period-and-classification record whose planned amount is compared with its
practical and theoretical amounts.

**Prerequisites**

- A budget line is present in **Budget Lines**.
- The line has a budgetary position or an analytic account.

**Steps**

1. Read **Planned Amount** to see the amount planned for the line.
2. Read **Practical Amount** to see the amount actually earned or spent.
3. Read **Theoretical Amount** to see the amount expected by the current date.
4. Read **Achievement** to compare the practical and theoretical amounts.
5. Select **Entries...** when you need the underlying detail.

The detail route depends on the line's classification:

| If the line has… | **Entries...** opens… |
|---|---|
| an analytic account | analytic items for that account and period |
| no analytic account | journal entries for the budgetary position's accounts and period |

**Result:** The budget-line measures are available, and **Entries...** opens the applicable detail
records.

## Budget validation messages

Budget validation messages identify the account, classification, or date condition that stops the
budget operation. Correct the named input before trying the budget operation again.

| Message | What to do |
|---|---|
| `The budget must have at least one account.` | Add at least one account to the budgetary position. |
| `You have to enter at least a budgetary position or analytic account on a budget line.` | Add a budgetary position or an analytic account to the budget line. |
| `"Start Date" of the budget line should be included in the Period of the budget` | Set the line's start date inside the budget period. |
| `"End Date" of the budget line should be included in the Period of the budget` | Set the line's end date inside the budget period. |

**Result:** The correction for the displayed budget validation message is identified.

## Know what is next

After a budget reaches its intended stage, its lines can lead to the underlying analytic or journal
detail, and the budget can lead to reporting and audit work.

Select **Entries...** on a budget line when you need the detail records. Continue with [Accounting
journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) for journal-entry work or
[Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) for reporting and audit work.

**Result:** You know whether to open line detail or continue with journal and reporting work.

<!-- source: admin-customer-portal-invoices-and-exports.md -->

# Customer portal invoices and exports

## Customer portal invoices and exports

Customer portal invoices are customer-facing invoice records that a signed-in reader can
locate, inspect, and download. Document exports provide a ZIP response for authorised
attachment IDs. These routes sit outside the main application menu and are useful when you
are supporting a customer who needs an invoice or its documents.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Find an invoice or narrow the invoice list | [Find and open customer invoices](#find-and-open-customer-invoices) |
| Understand the list or an invoice record | [Understand the invoice surfaces](#understand-the-invoice-surfaces) |
| Support a document download or ZIP export | [Support invoice downloads and document exports](#support-invoice-downloads-and-document-exports) |
| Diagnose an invoice-route failure | [When the invoice route fails](#when-the-invoice-route-fails) |
| Review payment-specific behaviour | Admin payments and follow-ups |

Open the customer-facing invoice list from the customer portal. The list also supports
additional pages, and each invoice reference opens its own record. Use **Download** for an
invoice document.

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- You are signed in for the invoice list route.
- You have the invoice identifier or enough customer information to locate the record.
- Invoice-list inputs are not required, and the invoice detail surface has no editable invoice
  fields.

The invoice detail route checks access before it opens the record. If that check fails, the
customer portal home page is the next destination. The application checks attachment read
access and read rules before it builds a ZIP response.

## Find and open customer invoices

The invoice list is the starting point for locating an existing customer-facing invoice.
Use its sort, filter, and search controls to reduce the list before opening the invoice
record.

**Prerequisites**

- You are signed in.
- You know the invoice reference, date, status, or document type you want to find.

**Steps**

1. Open the customer-facing invoice list from the customer portal.
2. Select **Sort By:** and choose one option from the table.

   | If you want to sort by… | Choose |
   |---|---|
   | Invoice date | **Date** |
   | Due date | **Due Date** |
   | Invoice reference | **Reference** |
   | Invoice status | **Status** |

3. Select **Filter By:** and choose one option from the table.

   | If you want to see… | Choose |
   |---|---|
   | All matching records | **All** |
   | Customer invoices and refunds | **Invoices** |
   | Vendor bills and refunds | **Bills** |

4. Enter a search value in **Search** when the search bar is available.
5. Select the invoice reference in the **Invoice #** column.

**Result:** The invoice list is sorted or filtered, or the selected invoice record opens.

The list can also be restricted by both a start date and an end date. When no records are
returned, the page displays `There are currently no invoices and payments for your account.`

The current invoice route displays a server error before the list controls become available:
`500: Internal Server Error`. In that state, **Sort By:** is not on screen and the invoice
list cannot be used.

## Understand the invoice surfaces

An invoice list row identifies a document through its reference, dates, status, and amount
due. An invoice record adds the document report, a download action, and communication history
for support work.

| Surface | What it provides |
|---|---|
| **Invoice #** | The invoice record link |
| **Invoice Date** | The invoice date |
| **Due Date** | The due date |
| **Status** | The invoice payment or cancellation status |
| **Amount Due** | The remaining monetary amount |
| invoice HTML | The embedded invoice report |
| Communication history | The invoice message thread |
| **Download** | The invoice document download |
| **Send message** | A message link when an invoice salesperson is present |

The invoice detail surface is for inspection and document access; it does not provide
editable invoice fields. The route can return an HTML, PDF, or text report when the matching
report type is requested. With no report parameters, it renders the invoice detail page.

## Support invoice downloads and document exports

A legal attachment is the document returned for a posted invoice. When more than one legal
attachment exists, the invoice download returns a ZIP. The direct export route also builds
a ZIP after checking attachment read access and read rules.

**Prerequisites**

- The invoice is open when you use **Download**.
- For the posted-invoice download branch, the invoice is posted.

**Steps**

1. Open the invoice record.
2. Select **Download**.
3. Check the returned document type.

   | If the request is… | The route returns… |
   |---|---|
   | A posted invoice with one legal attachment | The legal attachment |
   | A posted invoice with more than one legal attachment | A ZIP |
   | A report request for HTML, PDF, or text | The requested report |

**Result:** The invoice document or ZIP response is available for the customer-facing
document request.

## Handle invoice and access branches

Invoice branches tell you what the reader can see after filtering, opening, or requesting a
document. Use the visible status and the route outcome to choose the support path.

**Steps**

If invoice-detail access fails, the application redirects to the customer portal home page.

1. Check the invoice list outcome against the table.

   | If the list shows… | Continue with… |
   |---|---|
   | No records | The empty-list message |
   | Records | The invoice row and its status |
   | **Paid** | Document or payment follow-up support |
   | **Reversed** | Reversal support |
   | **Waiting for Payment** | Payment follow-up support |
   | **Cancelled** | Cancellation support |

2. Check whether the request included both a start date and an end date when the reader
   expects a date-restricted list.
3. Open the invoice record when access succeeds.
4. Send payment-method questions to Admin payments and follow-ups.

**Result:** You have identified the invoice branch and the next support route.

Payment-specific messages belong to the payment surface, including
`No suitable payment method could be found.` and
`If you believe that it is an error, please contact the website administrator.`

## When the invoice route fails

Use this section when the invoice route stops before the invoice list appears. The generic
invoice error message is `There was an error processing this page.`

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| `500: Internal Server Error` | A template-rendering failure stopped the invoice list. | Record the error details for support escalation. |
| A template-rendering failure caused by a missing database field | A required database field is unavailable. | Include the database-field error details in the escalation. |
| **Sort By:** is not on screen | The list did not reach the search-bar controls. | Troubleshoot the route error before attempting sorting. |

The error page also displays **Restore previous version (soft reset).** and **Reset to initial
version (hard reset).** These are recovery controls on the error page, not invoice-list
controls.

## Know what to do next

To continue, use [Find and open customer invoices](#find-and-open-customer-invoices) to locate
the record, [Understand the invoice surfaces](#understand-the-invoice-surfaces) to review it,
and [Support invoice downloads and document exports](#support-invoice-downloads-and-document-exports)
to handle its documents.

<!-- source: admin-reports-and-audit-work.md -->

# Admin reports and audit work

## What report and audit work is for

Administrative report work brings together the definitions, options, outputs, margins, cash-flow
forecasts, audit records, and accounting tests used to review financial activity and maintain the
reporting setup.

Use this page when you need to:

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Find a report or administration surface | [Find the report work](#find-the-report-work) |
| Set up a report definition or accounting test | [Configure report definitions and tests](#configure-report-definitions-and-tests) |
| Request a financial, daily, partner, tax, or journal report | [Run financial, daily, partner, tax, and journal reports](#run-financial-daily-partner-tax-and-journal-reports) |
| Review cash flow, margins, generated reports, or audit records | [Review management, cash-flow, margin, generated, and audit outputs](#review-management-cash-flow-margin-generated-and-audit-outputs) |
| Understand a hidden field or a stopped report flow | [Handle report branches and loading failures](#handle-report-branches-and-loading-failures) |
| Continue with report use or accounting setup | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) or [Accounting dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard) |
| Resolve a general application message | [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) or [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions) |

This page covers management, financial, daily, partner, tax, journal, audit, margin, cash-flow,
and test reports.

## Prerequisites for report administration

Before changing or running a report, prepare the accounting data and access needed by the report
family. The shared report options use **Journals**, **Start Date**, **End Date**, and **Target
Moves**. **Journals** and **Target Moves** are required. **Target Moves** starts with a default
value.

| Prepare | Why it matters |
|---|---|
| The journals to include | The report uses the selected journals as part of its report context. |
| Reporting period | The report applies the dates you enter to the period being reviewed. |
| The target entry scope | **Target Moves** distinguishes **All Posted Entries** from **All Entries**. |
| The company context | Some company fields and filters are restricted to multi-company access. |
| The report's current option state | Comparison fields, account fields, and cash-flow panels appear according to their conditions. |

The listed fields do not show a required marker. **Journals** and **Target Moves** are required, so
check those fields first when a report cannot be prepared.

## Find the report work

The Accounting reporting and configuration entries lead to the report definitions, report
wizards, generated outputs, audit records, product margins, cash-flow forecasts, and accounting
tests. Choose the destination by the work you need to do.

| If you need to… | Open |
|---|---|
| Review invoice or cash-flow management information | **Invoice Analysis** or **Cash Flow Forecast** |
| Review a saved report output or define its template | **Generated Reports** or **Custom Report Templates** |
| Review financial report definitions | **Account Reports** |
| Run a daily report | **Bank Book**, **Cash Book**, or **Day Book** |
| Run a partner, tax, journal, or balance report | **Aged Partner Balance**, **Partner Ledger**, **Tax Report**, **Journals Audit**, **General Ledger**, or **Trial Balance** |
| Review margins or accounting tests | **Product Margins** or **Accounting Tests** |
| Review audit records | **Audit Trail** |

## Configure report definitions and tests

A report definition describes the accounts, hierarchy, formulas, formatting, and filters that make
up a report. A custom template packages those choices for repeated generation. An accounting test
holds a named expression that can be reviewed with its description and code.

**Prerequisites**

- You know whether you are changing an **Account Report**, a **Report Template**, or an
  **Accounting Test**.
- You have the report name, code, account selection, formula, or test expression to enter.

**Steps**

1. Open **Account Reports** to create or adjust the report hierarchy, report type, sign, display
   detail, account report, accounts, or account type.
2. Open **Custom Report Templates** to set the template name, code, sequence, company, public
   setting, date range, comparison, display options, and default filters.

   | Template area | Fields to review |
   |---|---|
   | Ownership and use | `Public`, `Created By`, `Usage Count`, and `Last Generated Date` |
   | Report lines | `Report Lines`, `Line Type`, `Parent`, `Account Group`, and `Formula` |
   | Date and comparison | `Date & Comparison`, `Date Range`, `Comparison`, and `Comparison Type` |
   | Visual settings | `Visual Settings`, `Display Options`, and `Default Filters` |
3. Choose the configuration branch that matches your work:

   | If you need to… | Use |
   |---|---|
   | Set a template comparison type | **Comparison Type** when comparison is enabled |
   | Select accounts by report type | **Accounts** for `accounts`, or **Account Type** for `account_type` |
   | Generate a report from the template | **Generate Report** |
   | Open the visual report builder | **Open Visual Builder** |

4. Open **Accounting Tests** and enter the test's **Name**, **Sequence**, **Description**, and
   **Python Code**. Review **Active**, **Expression**, and **Code Help** when maintaining the test.

**Result:** The report definition, template, or accounting test contains the configuration entered
for its selected report type or test.

## Run financial, daily, partner, tax, and journal reports

Report wizards collect a period, journal scope, entry scope, and report-specific selections before
you request a report or PDF.

**Prerequisites**

- You know the report family and the period it must cover.
- You know which journals, accounts, partners, analytic accounts, or entry scope to include.

**Steps**

1. Open the report family you need.
2. Enter **Start Date** and **End Date** where the report uses a date range.
3. Select the journals in **Journals**.
4. Select the entry scope in **Target Moves**.
5. Apply the report-specific options:

   | If you are running… | Set the report-specific options |
   |---|---|
   | **Bank Book** or **Cash Book** | **Sort By**, **Initial Balance**, **Accounts**, and **Journals** |
   | **Day Book** | **Journals** |
   | **Aged Partner Balance** | **Period Length**, **Result Selection**, and **Partners** |
   | **General Ledger** | **Analytic Accounts**, **Accounts**, **Partners**, **Sort By**, **Display Account**, and **Initial Balance** |
   | **Partner Ledger** | **Partners**, **Result Selection**, **Amount Currency**, and **Reconciled** |
   | **Journals Audit** | **Amount Currency** and **Sort Selection** |
   | **Trial Balance** | **Display Account** and **Analytic Accounts** |
   | **Balance Sheet** | **Account Report**, **Enable Filter**, **Debit Credit**, **Label Filter**, **Filter Comparison**, and comparison dates |
   | **Tax Reports** | **Start Date** and **End Date** |

6. Choose the output action that matches your need:

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | View the report on screen | **View Report** |
   | Keep a PDF copy | **Download PDF** |
   | Print a daily report | **Print** |

**Result:** The selected report request uses the options entered for its report family.

## Review management, cash-flow, margin, generated, and audit outputs

Management outputs help you compare activity, inspect calculated balances, review margins, and
trace changes. Use the fields and tabs that match the question you are answering.

| If you need to… | Review |
|---|---|
| Inspect a forecast | **Forecast Name**, **Forecast Date**, **Forecast Horizon**, **Opening Balance**, **Total Inflow**, **Total Outflow**, **Net Cashflow**, and **Closing Balance** |
| Inspect forecast detail | **Forecast Lines**, **Breakdown by Source**, and **Forecast vs Actual** |
| Inspect a generated report | `Name`, `Template`, `Date From`, `Date To`, **Company**, `Total Balance`, `Comparison Period`, `Comparison Date From`, `Comparison Date To`, `Report Lines`, `Code`, **Balance**, `Balance Comparison`, `Variance`, and `Var %` |
| Inspect product performance | **Product**, **Internal Reference**, **Analysis Criteria**, **Start Date**, **End Date**, **Invoice State**, **Sales**, **Purchases**, and **Margins** |
| Inspect margin values | **Avg. Unit Price**, **Catalog Price**, **Sales Gap**, **Turnover**, **Standard Price**, **Purchase Gap**, **Total Cost**, **Normal Cost**, **Total Margin**, and **Expected Margin** |
| Inspect audit activity | `Name`, `Date`, `Author`, `Preview`, and the audit search fields for `Journal Entry`, `Account`, `Taxes`, `Partners`, and `Company` |

Cash-flow panels change with the forecast state. **Algorithm Metadata** appears after the forecast
leaves `draft`; **Error Details** appears when the forecast is in `error`; and **Forecast vs
Actual** appears when the forecast is `done`.

## Handle report branches and loading failures

Use the option conditions to decide which fields belong to the current branch, then use the exact
message on screen when the application stops the flow.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| **Algorithm Metadata** | The cash-flow forecast is no longer in `draft`. | Review **Algorithm Version** and **Computation Time**. |
| **Error Details** | The cash-flow forecast is in `error`. | Read **Error Details** before continuing. |
| **Forecast vs Actual** | The cash-flow forecast is in `done`. | Review the forecast and actual values together. |
| The comparison area is hidden | Balance Sheet comparison is disabled. | Enable **Filter Comparison** before entering comparison dates. |
| **Comparison Type** is hidden | Template comparison is not enabled. | Enable comparison before choosing its type. |
| Account fields differ by report type | The report type controls the account selection fields. | Use **Accounts** for `accounts` or **Account Type** for `account_type`. |
| `Sherkety ERP Session Expired` | The session has expired. | Select **Close**. |
| `Your Sherkety ERP session expired. The current page is about to be refreshed.` | The application is about to refresh the current page. | Wait for the refresh, then return to the report route. |

The **Update Only** and **Create Only** audit filters are restricted to system access. Multi-company
fields and filters are restricted where the report view applies multi-company access.

## Know what to do next

Report administration ends after the definition, options, output, or diagnosis is complete. To use
reports and audit work, continue to [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work).
For the accounting starting point, continue to [Accounting dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard).
For a session or application message, use [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages).
For cross-application recovery, use [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions).

<!-- source: customer-portal-invoices-and-exports.md -->

# Customer portal invoices and exports

## Customer portal invoices and documents

Customer portal invoices are customer-facing records that let you find invoices, open their
details, and request document downloads. Invoice terms are the company's conditions that
accompany its invoices. A document export packages selected attachments as a ZIP file.

| If you need to… | Go to… |
|---|---|
| Find an invoice or bill | [Find an invoice](#find-an-invoice) |
| Understand the list columns and statuses | [Understand the invoice list](#understand-the-invoice-list) |
| Open an invoice and request its documents | [Open and download an invoice](#open-and-download-an-invoice) |
| Read the company's invoice terms | [Read the invoice terms](#read-the-invoice-terms) |
| Export selected documents | [Export documents as a ZIP file](#export-documents-as-a-zip-file) |
| Configure or support these routes | [Customer portal invoices and exports](doc:admin-customer-portal-invoices-and-exports) |
| Continue invoice and payment work | [Customers, products, and invoices](doc:customers-products-and-invoices) and [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups) |

Start with the prerequisites, then find the invoice or document action you need.

## Before you start

Prerequisites

- Sign in before opening the invoice list or requesting an attachment export.
- Have a real invoice ID before opening an individual invoice route.
- For the terms page, invoice terms must be enabled and use HTML terms.
- For an attachment export, have readable attachment IDs and a filename.
- If the terms preview banner is available to your role, you can use **Back to settings**
  or **Close** from that banner.

With these conditions in place, find the invoice or bill you need.

## Find an invoice

An invoice list is the customer-facing starting point for locating an invoice or bill that is
already available to your account.

Prerequisites

- Sign in.

Steps

1. Open the invoice list from the customer portal home.
2. Choose the portal destination that matches your task:

   | If you need to… | Choose… |
   |---|---|
   | Open outgoing invoice records | **Your Invoices** |
   | Open incoming bill records | **Our Invoices** |

3. Choose the list view that matches your task:

   | If you need to… | Choose… |
   |---|---|
   | See all available invoice and bill records | **All** |
   | See outgoing invoices, refunds, and receipts | **Invoices** |
   | See incoming invoices, refunds, and receipts | **Bills** |

4. Use the default list ordering when you do not choose another sort option; it is **Date**.
5. Open the next page of the invoice list when the record you need is not on the current page.

**Result:** The invoice list opens with the selected invoice or bill scope and its default
date ordering when you make no other choice.

## Understand the invoice list

The invoice list is a table of available records. It gives you the invoice reference, dates,
payment status, and remaining amount before you open a record.

| Column or status | What to look for |
|---|---|
| **Invoice #** | Select the invoice reference to open its detail page. A draft record is shown as `Draft Invoice`. |
| **Invoice Date** | The date assigned to the invoice. |
| **Due Date** | The payment due date; this column is hidden on small screens. |
| **Status** | The payment or cancellation state shown for the record. |
| **Amount Due** | The remaining monetary amount; refund records use the negative residual expression. |
| **Paid** | The posted invoice has a paid or in-payment state. |
| **Reversed** | The posted invoice has a reversed payment state. |
| **Waiting for Payment** | The posted invoice has another payment state. |
| **Cancelled** | The invoice state is cancelled. |

When the account has no invoice records, the list displays:
`There are currently no invoices and payments for your account.`

Select a row's **Invoice #** to continue to its detail page.

## Open and download an invoice

An invoice detail page brings together the invoice report, the amount shown in the sidebar,
the responsible contact, and the available document actions.

Prerequisites

- Identify an invoice in the list.
- Have a saved invoice selected from the list.

Steps

1. Select the invoice reference in **Invoice #**.
2. Review the invoice report in the **Invoice HTML** area.
3. Review the amount shown in the invoice sidebar.
4. Select **Download** to request the invoice PDF.
5. If you need the discussion area, select **Send message**.

The available document response depends on the request:

| If the request is… | The response is… |
|---|---|
| An HTML, PDF, or text report request | The corresponding invoice report |
| A PDF download for a posted invoice with one legal attachment | The attachment as a PDF response |
| A PDF download for a posted invoice with multiple legal attachments | The attachments as a ZIP response |
| An invoice access check that fails | A redirect to the customer portal home |

**Result:** The invoice detail page remains available for review, or the requested invoice
report or legal-document response is returned.

Continue to the invoice terms when you need to check the conditions that accompany the invoice.

## Read the invoice terms

The terms page displays the company's invoice terms for readers who need to check the
conditions that accompany its invoices.

The page may show the configured heading **STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE**.

Prerequisites

- Invoice terms are enabled.
- The terms type is HTML.

Steps

1. Open the invoice terms page from the customer portal.
2. Read the terms shown on the page.
3. Use the preview banner according to your task:

   | If you need to… | Select… |
   |---|---|
   | Open settings | **Back to settings** |
   | Remove the banner | **Close** |

If the terms configuration does not meet the route requirements, use the result that matches
what you see:

| If… | The page… |
|---|---|
| Invoice terms are enabled and use HTML | Displays the terms page |
| Invoice terms are disabled or use another terms type | Displays the HTTP error page |

**Result:** The invoice terms page is open, or the page displays its HTTP error page.

When you need to package selected attachments, continue to the document export action.

## Export documents as a ZIP file

The document-export route packages selected readable attachments into one ZIP response; it
does not open a document-entry screen.

Prerequisites

- Sign in.
- Have the attachment IDs to export.
- Have the filename for the ZIP response.

Steps

1. Open the document export action with the attachment IDs and filename you provide.

**Result:** The selected attachments are returned as a ZIP file.

If the page displays a message instead of the expected result, use the matching troubleshooting
row below.

## When something goes wrong

Use the message on the page to identify the branch you reached.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| `There are currently no invoices and payments for your account.` | No invoice records are available in the list. | Return to the portal home and use the invoice or bill entry that matches the records you need. |
| `There was an error processing this page.` | The invoice detail page reported a generic processing error. | Return to the invoice list and open the record again. |
| `Oops` and `The requested page is invalid, or doesn't exist anymore.` | The terms route is unavailable for its current configuration. | Return to the portal area that brought you to the terms route. |
| `The field %s must be filled.` | A required selection field has no value. | Select a value in the required field before continuing. |
| `500: Internal Server Error` and `UndefinedColumn: column account_move.is_foreign_currency does not exist` | The invoice list failed while rendering the invoice template. | Use [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) for the next support step. |
| `Restore previous version (soft reset).` or `Reset to initial version (hard reset).` | The invoice route is showing its template recovery controls. | Do not use a recovery control as an invoice action; follow the support guidance instead. |

## What to do next

After you finish with the customer portal routes, continue according to the result:

| What you have now | Continue with… |
|---|---|
| An invoice that needs broader record work | [Customers, products, and invoices](doc:customers-products-and-invoices) |
| A payment status that needs follow-up | [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups) |
| A portal route that needs configuration or support | [Customer portal invoices and exports](doc:admin-customer-portal-invoices-and-exports) |
| A general route or server error | [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) |

Selecting an invoice reference continues from the invoice list to the invoice detail page.
**Back to settings** returns from the terms preview banner to settings. An invoice access
failure redirects to the customer portal home, and a successful document export ends with a
ZIP response.

<!-- source: getting-help.md -->

# Getting help

## Overview

**Support** is the route in the signed-in user menu for reaching the configured support
destination. Use it when you need help beyond the work area currently open.

| If you need to… | Go to |
| --- | --- |
| Locate the support route | [Find Support](#find-support) |
| Open the support route | [Use Support](#use-support) |
| Understand what the route provides | [When Support is not reachable](#when-support-is-not-reachable) |
| Finish with the application route | [What happens next](#what-happens-next) |

## Before you start

You need the signed-in application shell before you can open the user menu. **Support** is
listed in that menu.

![The signed-in application shell and its available controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/eb57f33f6aca9942371d90bc6819aa78.png)

Prerequisites

- Sign in to the application.
- Open the signed-in user menu.

## Find Support

The item is available in the user menu for reaching help from the application shell.

1. Open the signed-in user menu.
2. Look for **Support** in the menu.

**Result:** The **Support** item is visible in the signed-in user menu.

## Use Support

**Support** takes you from the application shell to the configured support destination.

1. Open the signed-in user menu.
2. Select **Support**.

The **Support** action is configured to open the support destination in a new browser tab.

**Result:** The **Support** action is selected.

## When Support is not reachable

The Support route is a menu item rather than an in-application support form. It does not carry
data-entry fields, grids, validation groups, confirmation dialogs, or inline error messages.
No support-flow message is declared.

1. Open the signed-in user menu.
2. Check whether **Support** is listed, then follow the matching alternative:

   | If you see… | Do this |
   | --- | --- |
   | **Support** | Select **Support** to continue to the configured support destination. |
   | No **Support** item | Open the signed-in user menu again and check the menu entries. |

**Result:** You know whether **Support** is available in the signed-in user menu, and you can
select it when it is listed.

## What happens next

The application route is `/web`. The application shell does not display a support-flow message,
dialog, or stage-change readout for this route.

When you select **Support**, continue in the configured support destination.

<!-- source: inventory-reporting.md -->

# Inventory reporting

## Inventory reporting

Inventory reporting brings together movement history, movement analysis, stock valuation,
inventory aging, and catch-weight variance views. Use the report that matches the question you
need to answer.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Read product movements, locations, quantities, or statuses | [Review inventory movements](#review-inventory-movements) |
| Read stock value or remaining quantity | [Review valuation and aging](#review-valuation-and-aging) |
| Compare expected and actual catch weight | [Review catch-weight variance](#review-catch-weight-variance) |
| Return to the inventory work that creates movement records | [Inventory transfers and returns](doc:inventory-transfers-and-returns) |
| Start from the inventory work hub | [Inventory overview](doc:inventory-overview) |
| Resolve report access and visibility settings | [Configure inventory reporting](doc:admin-inventory-reporting) |
| Review accounting and audit reports | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- Sign in with access to the Inventory reporting menu.
- Have the inventory records you want to review available in the system.
- Use the valuation and aging reports for products.

The reporting views are read-only for report rows. Review existing inventory data rather than
create or edit report rows.

> **Note:** Valuation and aging use product valuation information created by product movements.

## Find a report

Inventory reports answer different questions: **Moves History** follows completed and planned
movement records, **Move Analysis** presents movement analysis, **Valuation** presents stock
valuation, **Inventory Aging** presents aging measures, and **CW Variance Analysis** presents
catch-weight differences.

**Steps**

1. Open **Inventory**.
2. Open **Reporting**.
3. Select one report from the table.

| If you need to… | Select |
|---|---|
| Trace past or future product movements | **Moves History** |
| Analyze stock moves | **Move Analysis** |
| Review stock valuation | **Valuation** |
| Review aging by remaining quantity and value | **Inventory Aging** |
| Review catch-weight differences | **CW Variance Analysis** |

**Result:** The selected inventory report opens in its available list, pivot, or graph view.

## Understand the report views

A list view presents rows and columns, a pivot view summarizes measures by groups, and a graph
view presents a visual measure. The available information differs by report.

| Report | Reader-facing information named by the report | Other view information |
|---|---|---|
| **Moves History** | **Reference**, **Quantity**, **Unit**, and **Done By** | Movement date, product, locations, packages, company, and status are also part of the list definition. |
| **Move Analysis** | **From**, **To**, **Quantity**, and **Unit** | Movement date, reference, product, demand, packaging, company, and status are also part of the list definition. |
| **Valuation** | **Date** and **Moved Quantity** | The list also includes product, reference, valuation quantities, costs, value, description, and remaining value. |
| **Inventory Aging** | Quantity and value measures | The graph uses remaining quantity as a measure. |
| **CW Variance Analysis** | Expected, actual, and variance measures | The list, pivot, and graph use product and transaction information to group or measure variance. |

Some columns depend on access groups. Production-lot, tracking-lot, units-of-measure,
multi-company, packaging, accounting-user, and warehouse access affect which information is
available. Optional columns can also be hidden or shown by the report view.

## Review inventory movements

Movement reports show how inventory moved, where it moved from and to, how much moved, and the
status associated with each row.

**Prerequisites**

- Open **Moves History** or **Move Analysis** from Inventory reporting.

**Steps**

1. Select a search field to narrow the report to the product, transfer, reference, category,
   partner, source location, or destination location you need.
2. Select a movement filter.

| If you need to review… | Select |
|---|---|
| Work still to do | **To Do** |
| Completed movements | **Done** |
| Incoming movements | **Incoming** |
| Outgoing movements | **Outgoing** |
| Internal movements | **Internal** |
| Inventory movements | **Inventory** |
| A date range | **Date**, **Last 30 Days**, **Last 3 Months**, or **Last 12 Months** |
| Ready movements | **Ready** |
| Scheduled or processing date | **Date** |

3. Select a grouping when rows need to be arranged by product, status, date, transfer, location,
   category, operation type, picking, source location, destination location, creation date, or
   scheduled date.
4. Read the resulting rows using the headers available in the report.

**Result:** The movement report shows the rows that match your search, filter, and grouping choices.

## Review valuation and aging

Valuation reports show the stock-value history associated with product movements. Inventory Aging
uses the same valuation information to organize remaining quantity and remaining value over time.

**Prerequisites**

- Open **Valuation** or **Inventory Aging** from Inventory reporting.
- Review product records rather than non-product items.

**Steps**

1. In **Valuation**, search by product, reference, product category, product template, warehouse,
   or company.
2. Select **Incoming**, **Outgoing**, or **Has Remaining Qty** when you need to restrict the
   valuation rows.
3. Select **Product**, **Product Category**, **Date**, or **Company** to group the valuation rows.
4. In **Inventory Aging**, read the quantity and value measures in the pivot view.
5. Choose the valuation action that matches your question.

   | If you need to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Review valuation for a date | **Valuation at Date** |
   | Open the accounting entry attached to a row | **Journal Entry** |

**Result:** The report shows the selected valuation or aging view, with the matching product,
quantity, value, and grouping information.

## Review catch-weight variance

Catch-weight variance reporting compares the expected catch weight with the actual catch weight
and presents the difference for each relevant transaction.

**Prerequisites**

- Open **CW Variance Analysis** from Inventory reporting.

**Steps**

1. Search by product, partner, lot, or picking.
2. Select **Receipts**, **Deliveries**, **Internal**, **Tolerance Exceeded**, or **This Month**.
3. Select **Product**, **Partner**, **Transaction Type**, **Category**, **Lot**, or **Date (Month)**
   to group the results.
4. Read the expected, actual, absolute variance, percentage variance, and tolerance information
   in the list.
5. Choose the comparison view that matches your question.

   | If you need to… | Use |
   |---|---|
   | Compare products by transaction type | the pivot view |
   | Compare products by variance | the graph view |

**Result:** The report shows catch-weight variance rows or measures grouped and filtered for the
review you selected.

## Handle report variations

The report can show different fields and actions according to access, report context, row values,
and the selected view.

| Variation | What changes |
|---|---|
| Production-lot or tracking-lot access | Lot and package information is available when the corresponding access applies. |
| Units-of-measure access | Unit information is available. |
| Multi-company access | Company information is available. |
| Packaging access | Packaging information is available in Move Analysis. |
| Accounting-user access | Accounting-entry information and **Journal Entry** are available when the row has an accounting entry. |
| Valuation row values | **Add Manual Valuation** is available only when the valuation method is not standard and remaining stock quantity is greater than zero. |
| Inventory Aging view | The report can use pivot, tree, and graph views. |

**Steps**

1. Read the headers and actions available in the report you opened.
2. If a field or action is absent, continue with the fields and actions available in that report.
3. Choose the view that matches the question.

   | If you need to… | Use |
   |---|---|
   | Read individual rows | the list view |
   | Read grouped measures | the pivot view |
   | Compare measures visually | the graph view |

**Result:** The report is read using the fields, actions, and view available for its access and
current row data.

## When a report is empty or unavailable

An empty report message tells you whether the selected report has rows to display. A hidden field
or action follows the report's access and row conditions.

| What appears | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| `There's no product move yet` | Moves History has no product movement to display. | Return to [Inventory transfers and returns](doc:inventory-transfers-and-returns) and review the movement records that feed reporting. |
| `No stock move found` | Move Analysis has no stock move matching the current report. | Adjust the movement search, filter, or grouping. |
| `There are no valuation layers. Valuation layers are created when there are product moves that impact the valuation of the stock.` | The valuation or aging report has no valuation layer to display. | Review the product movements that affect stock valuation. |
| A field or action is absent | The field or action is controlled by access, report context, row data, or view mode. | Use [Configure inventory reporting](doc:admin-inventory-reporting) for access and report visibility questions. |

## What to do next

To continue inventory work, open **Inventory transfers and returns**. Move to the administrative
page when access controls the available report content.

| Next need | Continue with |
|---|---|
| Process the receipt, delivery, transfer, return, scrap, or landed-cost work behind movement data | [Inventory transfers and returns](doc:inventory-transfers-and-returns) |
| Return to inventory destinations | [Inventory overview](doc:inventory-overview) |
| Configure report access and troubleshoot visibility | [Configure inventory reporting](doc:admin-inventory-reporting) |
| Review accounting and audit reporting | [Reports and audit work](doc:reports-and-audit-work) |

**Result:** You know whether to continue with inventory operations, inventory configuration, or
accounting and audit reporting.

<!-- source: admin-manufacturing-cost-and-distribution-extras.md -->

# Configure Manufacturing Cost and Distribution Extras

## What this work covers

Administrators use these settings to prepare allocation, cost-driver, factory,
postdated-check, and distribution-extra work in Accounting.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Set up allocation rules, cost elements, cost-element groups, cost drivers, or a CSV import | [Configure allocation rules and cost-driver data](#configure-allocation-rules-and-cost-driver-data) |
| Maintain factories and account distribution by factory | [Configure factories and account distribution](#configure-factories-and-account-distribution) |
| Mature, bounce, or collect a postdated check | [Process postdated checks](#process-postdated-checks) |
| Review allocation lines, variance, or year-to-date results | [Understand the fields, rows, and guarded areas](#understand-the-fields-rows-and-guarded-areas) |
| Maintain the accounting records used by these settings | [Accounts, taxes, and currencies](doc:admin-accounts-taxes-and-currencies) |
| Maintain products and categories used by factory distribution | [Products, packages, and delivery](doc:admin-products-packages-and-delivery) |
| Review resulting reports and audit information | [Reports and audit work](doc:admin-reports-and-audit-work) |
| Administer payment work related to checks | [Payments and follow-ups](doc:admin-payments-and-follow-ups) |

## Before you start

These settings control how allocation and distribution work is prepared. Use the
records and dates that belong to the company and period you are configuring.

**Prerequisites**

- Have access to the Accounting destinations for the work you need to perform.
- Have the company, accounting period, journal, analytic accounts, cost elements,
  factories, and account records you need to select.
- For a monthly allocation, have the accounting date and period ready.
- For a matrix import, have the CSV file, delimiter, header choice, and company ready.
- For a postdated-check operation, have the check, operation date, and destination
  journal ready where that operation requires them.

With these records, dates, and access conditions ready, continue to the destination
that matches your task.

## Find the configuration or work surface

Each destination is a separate list, report, or wizard for one part of the
allocation and distribution work. Use the destination that matches the job rather
than changing an unrelated record.

**Prerequisites**

- You are in Accounting.
- You know whether you are configuring inputs, running an allocation, reviewing
  results, configuring factory distribution, or processing a postdated check.

**Steps**

1. Open the Accounting menu.
2. Select one destination from the table below.

   | Your job | Destination |
   |---|---|
   | Review or create allocation runs | **Allocation Runs** |
   | Start a monthly allocation | **Run Monthly Allocation** |
   | Inspect generated allocation rows | **All Allocation Lines** |
   | Review budget-versus-actual variance | **Variance Report** |
   | Review year-to-date amounts received by production cost centre | **YTD by Production CC** |
   | Review year-to-date amounts drained by service cost centre | **YTD by Service CC** |
   | Maintain allocation rules | **Matrix** |
   | Load matrix rules from a CSV file | **Import Matrix from CSV** |
   | Maintain cost-element groups | **Cost Element Groups** |
   | Maintain cost elements | **Cost Elements** |
   | Review hours-based cost-driver data | **Cost Drivers (hours)** |
   | Maintain factories | **Factories** |
   | Maintain category-and-factory account rows | **Per-Factory Account Overrides** |
   | Move eligible checks to collection | **Mature Bills Today** |
   | Record a returned postdated bill | **Bounce a Postdated Bill** |
   | Move a postdated check into cash or bank liquidity | **Collect / Cash Postdated Check** |

3. Select a row when you need to inspect or change an existing record.

**Result:** The work surface for the selected task is on screen.

## Understand the fields, rows, and guarded areas

The allocation and distribution surfaces use lists for records and rows, forms for
configuration, and wizards for one-time operations. Use these field lists to identify
each area’s purpose.

| Surface | What it contains | Use it to… |
|---|---|---|
| Allocation Runs | Name, period, company, method, presentation, journal, totals, variance, line count, and state | identify a run and review its allocation result |
| Allocation Run | Company, period, accounting date, journal, rate mode, and allocation lines | review the run inputs and the rows it produced |
| Allocation Lines | Run, cascade step, source, target, cost element, GL account, balances, rates, amounts, variance, and state | inspect the detail behind an allocation |
| Variance Report | Period, company, source, target, cost element, budget total, actual total, variance amount, variance percentage, and line count | compare budget and actual allocation amounts |
| YTD by Production CC | Period, company, target, and total received | review amounts received by production cost centre |
| YTD by Service CC | Period, company, source, total drained, planned hours, and actual hours | review amounts drained by service cost centre |
| Overhead Matrix | Source, target, cost element, fiscal year, month, rates, effective dates, active state, and company | define where allocation amounts go and at what rates |
| Cost Element Groups | Sequence, code, name, element count, active state, company, and embedded elements | organise cost elements and their GL accounts |
| Cost Elements | Code, name, group, default GL account, active state, company, colour, sequence, external reference, and target GL accounts | define the cost categories used by allocation |
| Cost Drivers (hours) | Analytic account, cost-centre type, fiscal year, total hours, actual hours YTD, completion percentage, company, and notes | review hours-based allocation data |
| Import Matrix from CSV | Company, delimiter, header choice, filename, file, processing counts, and error report | preview or apply matrix rules from a file |
| Factories | Sequence, code, name, company, active state, and notes | maintain the factory records used in distribution |
| Per-Factory Account Overrides | Product category, factory, stock valuation, stock input, stock output, and COGS accounts | assign category accounts for a factory |
| Postdated-check wizards | Check, dates, company, reason, and deposit journal as applicable | mature, bounce, or collect a check |

The screen changes with the run's state and setup. A previewed run carries
**Re-compute Preview** and **Post**, and its allocation lines are editable. A posted
run carries **Cancel / Reverse**. A generated journal entry adds **Journal Entry**.
Step-down allocation shows cascade steps. Fan-out presentation shows the GL Account
allocation-line column and its explanation. A blocked variance shows the
over-threshold approval details. A processed matrix import shows **Result** and its
processing counts. A multi-company factory setup shows Company on the factory list
and form.

**Result:** You can identify the fields, rows, and guarded areas before changing a
configuration or running an operation.

## Configure allocation rules and cost-driver data

An allocation rule directs an amount from a source cost centre to a target cost centre
for a period and rate. Cost elements and cost drivers provide the categories and
hours information used around that allocation.

### Configure a matrix rule

**Prerequisites**

- Have the source and target analytic accounts, cost element, fiscal year, and rate.
- Use different source and target cost centres.
- Use a budget rate from 0 through 100.
- Set Effective From no later than Effective To when both dates are used.

**Steps**

1. Open **Matrix**.
2. Select an existing rule.
3. Review the source, target, cost element, fiscal year, month, and rate values.
4. Review the effective dates when the rule has a limited period.

**Result:** The allocation rule's source, target, rate, period, and active state are on screen.

### Create an allocation preview

**Prerequisites**

- Have the company, period, accounting date, and journal ready.
- Confirm that the period is open and that no posted run already exists for the period.

**Steps**

1. Open **Run Monthly Allocation**.
2. Select the company.
3. Enter the period.
4. Enter the accounting date.
5. Select the journal.
6. Select **Create Preview**.

**Result:** A previewed allocation run is created for review.

### Review and post an allocation run

**Prerequisites**

- Have a previewed allocation run open.
- Review its allocation lines, totals, variance, and variance status before posting.

**Steps**

1. Open **Allocation Runs**.
2. Select the previewed run.
3. Select **Re-compute Preview** when the allocation needs to be recalculated.
4. Review the Allocation Lines tab.
5. Select **Post**.
6. Confirm the posting prompt: `Posting will create the journal entry and lock the run. Continue?`.

**Result:** The run is posted and locked, and the generated journal entry is available through **Journal Entry**.

### Cancel and reverse a posted allocation run

**Prerequisites**

- Have a posted allocation run open.

**Steps**

1. Select **Cancel / Reverse**.
2. Confirm `This will create a reversal journal entry. Continue?`.

**Result:** A reversal journal entry is created for the posted run.

### Import matrix rules from a CSV file

**Prerequisites**

- Have a CSV file and know whether it contains a header row.
- Know the delimiter used by the file.

**Steps**

1. Open **Import Matrix from CSV**.
2. Select the company.
3. Enter the delimiter.
4. Set the header option.
5. Select the CSV file.
6. Select **Dry run (preview only)**.
7. Review the Result section and Error Report.
8. Select **Apply**.
9. Confirm `This will create / update matrix rules. Continue?`.

**Result:** The import result shows the processing counts, and the matrix rules are created or updated when the import is applied.

## Configure factories and account distribution

A factory is the accounting unit used to distinguish distribution by manufacturing
location. A per-factory override assigns stock and COGS accounts to a product
category for that factory.

### Maintain a factory

**Prerequisites**

- Have the factory name, code, company, sequence, and notes ready.

**Steps**

1. Open **Factories**.
2. Select an existing factory.
3. Review the factory name.
4. Review the code.
5. Review the company when the field is shown.
6. Review the sequence.
7. Review the active state.
8. Review Notes.

**Result:** The factory is available for product and account-distribution configuration.

### Assign factory accounts to a product category

**Prerequisites**

- Have an existing product category and factory.
- Have the stock valuation, stock input, stock output, and COGS accounts for the company.

**Steps**

1. Open **Per-Factory Account Overrides**.
2. Select an existing override row.
3. Review the product category.
4. Review the factory.
5. Review the Stock Valuation Account.
6. Review the Stock Input Account.
7. Review the Stock Output Account.
8. Review the COGS Account.

**Result:** The category-and-factory override is available for distribution accounting.

## Process postdated checks

Postdated-check work moves a check through maturity, return, or collection handling.
Choose the operation that matches the check's current business situation.

| If you need to… | Use |
|---|---|
| Move eligible in-hand checks to collection | **Mature Bills Today** |
| Record that a postdated bill was returned | **Bounce a Postdated Bill** |
| Move a check into cash or a bank journal | **Collect / Cash Postdated Check** |

### Mature eligible checks

**Prerequisites**

- Have the cutoff date and company ready.

**Steps**

1. Open **Mature Bills Today**.
2. Enter the Cutoff Date.
3. Select the company.
4. Select **Run**.

**Result:** The operation reports `Bills matured` and `Promoted %s postdated check(s) to Bills for Collection.`.

### Bounce a postdated bill

**Prerequisites**

- Have a posted postdated-check payment that is still in hand or in collection.
- Have the bounce date and reason ready.

**Steps**

1. Open **Bounce a Postdated Bill**.
2. Select the Postdated Check Payment.
3. Enter the Bounce Date.
4. Enter the Bounce Reason.
5. Select **Bounce**.

**Result:** The postdated bill is recorded as bounced and the resulting journal entry opens.

### Collect or cash a postdated check

**Prerequisites**

- Have a posted postdated check that is still in hand or in collection.
- Have the collection date and destination journal ready.

**Steps**

1. Open **Collect / Cash Postdated Check**.
2. Select the Postdated Check.
3. Select the deposit journal in Deposit To.
4. Enter the Collection Date.
5. Select **Collect**.

**Result:** The check is settled into the selected cash or bank journal and the resulting journal entry opens.

## When the destination does not open or a value is rejected

Use the message on screen to choose the correction. The messages below are the
messages associated with these allocation, matrix, and postdated-check actions.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| `The period is locked. Cannot create a new run.` | The accounting date is in a locked period. | Choose an accounting date in an open period. |
| `A posted run already exists for %s / %s. Cancel it first.` | A posted run already exists for the company and period. | Open the existing run and use **Cancel / Reverse** before rerunning. |
| `Source and target cannot be the same cost centre.` | The matrix rule uses the same source and target. | Select different source and target cost centres. |
| `Budget rate must be between 0 and 100.` | The budget rate is outside the accepted range. | Enter a budget rate from 0 through 100. |
| `Default actual rate must be between 0 and 100.` | The default actual rate is outside the accepted range. | Enter a default actual rate from 0 through 100. |
| `Effective-from date must be ≤ effective-to date.` | The effective dates are in the wrong order. | Move Effective From to the same date or an earlier date than Effective To. |
| `Default GL account must be one of the target GL accounts.` | The default account is not in the target account set. | Select a default account from the target GL accounts. |
| `Pick a postdated-check payment to bounce.` | No payment was selected for the bounce action. | Select the Postdated Check Payment, then select **Bounce**. |
| `This payment has already been bounced.` | The selected payment has already been bounced. | Select a postdated-check payment that has not been bounced. |
| `Pick a postdated cheque to collect.` | No check was selected for collection. | Select the Postdated Check, then select **Collect**. |
| `Period is locked. The accounting date is on or before the company's period_lock_date. Cannot create a run.` | The wizard cannot create a run for that accounting date. | Change the accounting date to an open period. |
| `A posted run already exists for this period. Cancel it first to re-run.` | The period already has a posted run. | Cancel the existing run before selecting **Create Preview** again. |

**Result:** You either correct the value, choose the existing record, or use the
related administration page for the next action.

## Know what to do next

After configuration, use the resulting list, report, or journal entry to continue
the accounting work.

| After you… | Continue with… |
|---|---|
| Create a preview | Review Allocation Lines, totals, variance, and variance status before **Post**. |
| Post a run | Open **Journal Entry** to review the generated entry. |
| Cancel a posted run | Review the reversal journal entry. |
| Import matrix rules | Review the Result counts and the updated **Matrix** list. |
| Mature checks | Continue with the collection work for checks moved to collection. |
| Bounce a bill | Review the resulting journal entry. |
| Collect a check | Review the resulting journal entry in the selected destination journal. |

For related administration, continue with [Accounts, taxes, and currencies](doc:admin-accounts-taxes-and-currencies), [Products, packages, and delivery](doc:admin-products-packages-and-delivery), [Reports and audit work](doc:admin-reports-and-audit-work), or [Payments and follow-ups](doc:admin-payments-and-follow-ups).

**Result:** You know which record, report, journal entry, or related administration
page to open next.

<!-- source: reports-and-audit-work.md -->

# Reports and audit work

## What these reports are for

Reports and audit work turn accounting activity into views you can use for daily
review, financial review, partner balances, tax work, journal review, audit
history, product margins, cash-flow work, accounting tests, and product
categories. Use this page when you need to choose a report, set its reporting
options, run it, or understand a report-related validation message.

The work moves from accounting activity to review:

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Review journals, bank activity, or daily movements | [Accounting journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity) and [Run a daily report](#run-a-daily-report) |
| Choose and run a financial, partner, tax, or ledger report | [Find the report you need](#find-the-report-you-need), then [Run financial, partner, tax, and ledger reports](#run-financial-partner-tax-and-ledger-reports) |
| Review analysis, audit history, margins, categories, or tests | [Review analysis, audit, margin, category, and test surfaces](#review-analysis-audit-margin-category-and-test-surfaces) |
| Configure report access and administrative report work | [Configure reports and audit work](doc:admin-reports-and-audit-work) |
| Understand the accounting hub before choosing a report | [Accounting dashboard](doc:accounting-dashboard) |
| Resolve a message that is not specific to these reports | [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) and [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions) |

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- Have the reporting period ready. Shared report options use **Start Date** and
  **End Date**.
- Know which **Journals** and **Company** provide the accounting activity for
  the report.
- Know whether the report needs **Target Moves**, a partner, an account, an
  analytic account, or another report-specific filter.
- Have the access required by the destination. The **Company** column in
  Invoice Analysis requires multi-company access. Accounting Tests requires
  technical access. Multi-currency options in Journals Audit and Partner
  Ledger require multi-currency access.

The common report options use **Target Moves**, **Start Date**, **End Date**,
the journal selection, and **Company**. **Company** is hidden on the report option form;
the journal choices are constrained by the selected company.

## Find the report you need

Use the Accounting reporting destinations to open the report that answers your
question.

**Prerequisites**

- You know whether you need a daily, financial, partner, tax, journal, audit,
  analysis, margin, category, or test report.
- You have the access described in [Before you start](#before-you-start).

**Steps**

1. Open the reporting destination that matches your question.

   | If you need to… | Open |
   |---|---|
   | Analyse invoice amounts and dimensions | **Invoice Analysis**, the invoice review surface |
   | Review cash-flow forecasts | **Cash Flow Forecast** |
   | Open saved generated reports | **Generated Reports** |
   | Work with report templates | **Custom Report Templates** |
   | Run accounting tests | **Accounting Tests** |
   | Maintain account reports | **Account Reports** |
   | Run a daily, partner, tax, journal, ledger, or balance report | Open the named report from the corresponding Reporting destination, then continue with [Run a daily report](#run-a-daily-report) or [Run financial, partner, tax, and ledger reports](#run-financial-partner-tax-and-ledger-reports). |

**Result:** The report destination matching your question is open.

## Run a daily report

A daily report reviews movements for a selected period. Bank Book, Cash Book,
and Day Book each provide report options and a **Print** action.

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened **Bank Book**, **Cash Book**, or **Day Book**.
- You know the period and the journals to include.

**Steps**

1. Choose the daily report you need.

   | If you need to review… | Use |
   |---|---|
   | Bank activity | **Bank Book** |
   | Cash activity | **Cash Book** |
   | Day-level activity | **Day Book** |

2. Set the report options.

   | Report | Options |
   |---|---|
   | **Bank Book** | **Target Moves**, **Sort by**, **Display Account**, **Initial Balance**, **Start Date**, **End Date**, **Accounts**, and **Journals** |
   | **Cash Book** | **Target Moves**, **Sort by**, **Display Account**, **Initial Balance**, **Start Date**, **End Date**, **Accounts**, and **Journals** |
   | **Day Book** | **Target Moves**, **Start Date**, **End Date**, **Journals**, and **Accounts** |

3. Choose the action that matches what you want to do.

   | If you want to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Submit the daily report options | **Print** |
   | Close the report options without submitting | **Cancel** |

**Result:** The selected daily report options are submitted.

## Run financial, partner, tax, and ledger reports

These reports apply shared period and journal options to financial statements,
partner balances, tax work, journal review, and ledger review.

**Prerequisites**

- You have opened **Aged Partner Balance**, **Balance Sheet**, **General
  Ledger**, **Journals Audit**, **Partner Ledger**, **Tax Reports**, or **Trial
  Balance**.
- You know the reporting period and the journals to include.
- For **Aged Partner Balance**, have a positive **Period Length (days)** and a
  **Start Date**.

**Steps**

1. Choose the report that answers your question.

   | If you need to review… | Use |
   |---|---|
   | Balances by partner and ageing periods | **Aged Partner Balance** |
   | A financial statement | **Balance Sheet** |
   | Account movements | **General Ledger** |
   | Journal entries | **Journals Audit** |
   | Partner movements | **Partner Ledger** |
   | Tax activity | **Tax Reports** |
   | Account balances | **Trial Balance** |

2. Set the shared options **Target Moves**, **Start Date**, **End Date**,
   **Journals**, and **Company**.

3. Set the report-specific options.

   | Report | Additional options and conditions |
   |---|---|
   | **Aged Partner Balance** | **Period Length (days)**, **Receivable**, and **Partners**. **Period Length (days)** defaults to 30, and **Start Date** defaults to the current date. |
   | **Balance Sheet** | **Account Report**, **Enable Filter**, **Debit/Credit**, **Label Filter**, **Comparison**, **Comparison Start Date**, and **Comparison End Date**. **Label Filter** is required when **Enable Filter** is true. **Debit/Credit** is hidden when **Enable Filter** is true. **Comparison Start Date** and **Comparison End Date** are required when **Comparison** is set to the date filter. |
   | **General Ledger** | **Analytic Accounts**, **Accounts**, **Partners**, **Sort by**, **Display Account**, and **Initial Balance**. An initial balance requires **Start Date**. |
   | **Journals Audit** | **Multi-currency** and **Sort by**. **Multi-currency** requires multi-currency access. |
   | **Partner Ledger** | **Partners**, **Receivable/Payable**, **Multi-currency**, and **Reconciled**. **Multi-currency** requires multi-currency access. |
   | **Tax Reports** | Use the shared options. |
   | **Trial Balance** | **Display Account** and **Analytic Accounts**. |

4. Choose the action that matches what you want to do.

   | If you want to… | Select |
   |---|---|
   | Submit the report options | **Print** |
   | Close the report options without submitting | **Cancel** |

**Result:** The selected financial, partner, tax, journal, ledger, or balance
report options are submitted.

## Review analysis, audit, margin, category, and test surfaces

Each surface answers a different review question:

| If you need to review… | Surface and reader-facing information |
|---|---|
| Invoice amounts and invoice dimensions | Invoice Analysis provides **Invoice Number**, Journal, Customer, Country, **Invoice Date**, **Due Date**, Salesperson, Product Category, Product, Company, Average Price, Quantity, Untaxed Total, Total, Margin, Inventory Value, Status, Payment Status, and Type. It offers graph and pivot views. |
| Changes recorded in the audit history | **Audit Trail** provides Record, Date, Author, Name, Preview, Move, Account, Tax, Partner, and Company. |
| Product margin options | **Product Margins** provides **From**, **To**, and **Invoice State**, then **Open Margins** and **Cancel**. |
| Product categories | **Product Categories** provides **Products**, **Category**, **Parent**, and **Product Category**. |
   | Account-report definitions | **Account Reports** provides Name, Parent, Sequence, Type, Sign, Style Overwrite, Display Detail, Account Report, Accounts, Account Types, and Child Reports. |
   | Accounting test definitions | **Accounting Tests** provides Sequence, Name, Description, Active, and Code. Access requires technical access. |

When you select **Type**, the account-report form shows either **Accounts** or
**Account Types** according to that selection.

On Product Categories, select **Products** to open the related products. On
Product Margins, select **Open Margins** after setting **From**, **To**, and
**Invoice State**. Use the related configuration pages when your work is about
accounts, taxes, or journals rather than the report view itself: [Accounts,
taxes, and currencies](doc:accounts-taxes-and-currencies) and [Accounting
journals and bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity).

The report destinations may open the application shell or an empty surface
instead of a report form. When that happens, the shell is not the report screen.

The application shell includes these controls:

| Area | Controls |
|---|---|
| Appearance | **Menu Style**, **Font Type**, **Preloader Option**, and **Theme Colors** |
| Colours | **Brand Color**, **Background Color**, and **Sidebar Color** |
| Discussion | **Chatter Position** |
| Shell settings | **Save** and **Reset To Default** |

## Handle validation and rendering problems

Use the exact message on screen to choose the correction.

| Message | What to do |
|---|---|
| `You must define a Start Date` | In General Ledger, set **Start Date** when you select **Initial Balance**. |
| `You must set a period length greater than 0.` | In Aged Partner Balance, enter a positive value in **Period Length (days)**. |
| `You must set a start date.` | In Aged Partner Balance, enter **Start Date**. |
| `Form content is missing, this report cannot be printed.` | The report cannot be printed while this message appears. |

These report conditions change what you enter:

- **Label Filter** is required when **Enable Filter** is true.
- **Comparison Start Date** and **Comparison End Date** are required when the
  comparison filter uses a date.
- **Initial Balance** in General Ledger requires **Start Date**.

**Result:** You know which value to correct before selecting **Print** again.

## Know what to do next

Continue your accounting review from the report question that led you here:

- For journal, bank, and cash activity, continue with [Accounting journals and
  bank activity](doc:accounting-journals-and-bank-activity).
- For account and tax reference data, continue with [Accounts, taxes, and
  currencies](doc:accounts-taxes-and-currencies).
- For administrative access and report configuration, continue with [Configure
  reports and audit work](doc:admin-reports-and-audit-work).
- For a general loading or access problem, continue with [Common issues and
  solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions).

<!-- source: admin-recurring-payments-and-statutory-configuration.md -->

# Recurring payments and statutory configuration

## Overview

A recurring payment is a payment record that carries its payment details, dates, journal, and
recurring-entry lines. A recurring template holds the journal and recurrence settings used for a
recurring-payment setup.

| If you need to… | Go to… |
| --- | --- |
| Check access to the accounting menus | [Before you start](#before-you-start) |
| Reach an existing recurring payment or template | [Find recurring-payment records and templates](#find-recurring-payment-records-and-templates) |
| Identify fields, entries, lists, and state controls | [Understand the recurring-payment screens](#understand-the-recurring-payment-screens) |
| Check which state or access rule applies | [Configure access and handle state branches](#configure-access-and-handle-state-branches) |
| Troubleshoot a wrong page, empty page, or expired session | [When the recurring-payment surface does not open](#when-the-recurring-payment-surface-does-not-open) |
| Configure statutory electronic invoicing | [Configure electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:admin-electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting) |

Statutory configuration belongs on the mirrored electronic-invoicing page, not on this page.

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- You have an account user or account manager role. Those groups control access to the recurring-payment menus.
- You are signed in with an active session before opening either list.

If **Recurring Payment** opens the settings page instead of the list, return to **Accounting**, open
**Configuration**, and choose **Recurring Payment**. If the session-expired message appears, follow
the steps in [When the recurring-payment surface does not open](#when-the-recurring-payment-surface-does-not-open).

## Find recurring-payment records and templates

A recurring-payment list is where you locate payment records; a recurring-template list is where
you locate recurrence setups.

**Prerequisites**

You have the access described in [Before you start](#before-you-start).

**Steps**

1. Open **Accounting**, then **Configuration**, and choose one destination from the table.

| If you need to… | Choose… |
| --- | --- |
| Open payment records | **Recurring Payment** |
| Open recurrence setups | **Recurring Template** |

**Result:** The selected recurring-payment list or recurring-template list is on screen.

## Understand the recurring-payment screens

A recurring-payment screen combines record details with recurrence information and, for a payment
record, a Recurring Entries area. A recurring-template screen groups the journal and recurrence
settings used by that template.

| Surface | What it contains |
| --- | --- |
| **Recurring Payment** | Payment details, dates, journal, recurrence information, and a description area |
| **Recurring Entries** | Entry rows and **Create Payment** |
| **Recurring Template** | Journal and recurrence settings, company information, and a description area |

The **Recurring Entries** area does not permit creating, deleting, or editing rows.

The state controls are **Done** and **Set To Draft** on a recurring payment, **Confirm** and
**Set To Draft** on a recurring template, and **Create Payment** on a recurring-entry line.

## Configure access and handle state branches

Use the record state shown by the status bar to determine which state control is available. The
following branches apply:

| What you need to do | Condition to check | Control |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Complete a draft recurring payment | The payment is in draft | **Done** |
| Return a completed recurring payment to draft | The payment is done | **Set To Draft** |
| Create a payment from a recurring-entry line | The line is not done | **Create Payment** |
| Confirm a draft recurring template | The template is in draft | **Confirm** |
| Return a completed recurring template to draft | The template is done | **Set To Draft** |

**Prerequisites**

You have an account user or account manager role, and the record is in the state required by the
control you need.

**Steps**

1. Open the relevant record from its list.
2. Read the state in the status bar.
3. Select the control whose condition matches that state.

**Result:** The available state control matches the record state. If the list or control is not on
screen, continue to [When the recurring-payment surface does not open](#when-the-recurring-payment-surface-does-not-open).

## When the recurring-payment surface does not open

Use this table when the page does not show the recurring-payment list or template list.

| What you see | What it means | What to do |
| --- | --- | --- |
| The browser lands on `/web` instead of the recurring-payment list. | The requested recurring-payment surface is not open. | Open **Accounting**, then **Configuration**, and choose **Recurring Payment** again. |
| The page is empty and no controls or buttons are visible. | The recurring-payment list is not on screen. | Return to the **Accounting** > **Configuration** menu and reopen the destination. |
| `Sherkety ERP Session Expired` | The session has expired. | Select **Close**, sign in again, and reopen the destination. |
| `Your Sherkety ERP session expired. The current page is about to be refreshed.` | The current page is being refreshed after session expiry. | Select **Close**, sign in again, and reopen the destination. |

If the page shows **Menu Style**, **Font Type**, **Preloader Option**, **Theme Colors**, **Brand
Color**, **Background Color**, **Sidebar Color**, or **Chatter Position**, you are on the settings
page. The settings page also has **Save** and **Reset To Default**. Return to **Accounting**, open
**Configuration**, and choose **Recurring Payment**.

**Result:** You know whether the requested recurring-payment surface was reached or which access,
route, empty-page, or session condition stopped it.

## Know what is next

Statutory configuration is covered in [Configure electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:admin-electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting).

**Result:** Statutory work has a separate destination, and recurring-payment actions remain subject
to the state and access conditions above.

<!-- source: manufacturing-cost-and-distribution-extras.md -->

# Manufacturing cost and distribution extras

Find allocation work, review the conditions that change an allocation run, and reach the
Distribution Extras destinations named by the product.

## Manufacturing cost and distribution extras

An allocation run is the record where you review allocation results and choose whether
to recompute, post, or reverse the run. Cost-driver work is the configuration and review
work reached through **Cost Drivers (hours)** and related reports and configuration.
Distribution Extras destinations are the product's named destinations for factory,
postdated-bill, and postdated-check work.

| If you need to… | Go to |
|---|---|
| Find an allocation list or wizard | [Find an allocation or Distribution Extras destination](#find-an-allocation-or-distribution-extras-destination) |
| Understand the run controls and conditional areas | [Understand an allocation run](#understand-an-allocation-run) |
| Recompute, post, or review a run | [Run and review an allocation](#run-and-review-an-allocation) |
| Choose the correct allocation branch | [Handle allocation modes and run states](#handle-allocation-modes-and-run-states) |
| A destination opens somewhere unexpected | [When a destination does not render](#when-a-destination-does-not-render) |
| Continue after posting or reversing | [After the allocation](#after-the-allocation) |

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- Open an allocation run that is in `previewed` state before using **Re-compute Preview**
  or **Post**.
- Open an allocation run that is in `posted` state before using **Cancel / Reverse**.
- Check whether the run uses `step_down` method before looking for **Cascade steps** or
  **Cascade step**.
- Check whether the run uses `fanout` presentation before looking for **GL Account** in
  its allocation lines.
- Check whether the variance status is `blocked` before looking for **Over-threshold
  approval**.
- Open the **Reversal** area only after the allocation run is in `cancelled` state.

After checking these conditions, find the destination for the work you need to do.

## Find an allocation or Distribution Extras destination

Use the Accounting menu to choose the destination that matches the work you need to do.

| If you need to… | Open |
|---|---|
| Review allocation runs | **Allocation Runs** |
| Start a monthly allocation | **Run Monthly Allocation** |
| Review allocation lines | **All Allocation Lines** |
| Review allocation results | **Variance Report**, **YTD by Production CC**, or **YTD by Service CC** |
| Configure allocation work | **Matrix**, **Import Matrix from CSV**, **Cost Element Groups**, **Cost Elements**, or **Cost Drivers (hours)** |
| Configure Distribution Extras | **Factories** or **Per-Factory Account Overrides** |
| Work with postdated bills and checks | **Mature Bills Today**, **Bounce a Postdated Bill**, or **Collect / Cash Postdated Check** |

**Prerequisites**

- Know whether you are reviewing an existing allocation, starting a monthly allocation,
  configuring cost drivers, or opening a Distribution Extras destination.

**Steps**

1. Open the Accounting menu.
2. Select the destination that matches your work in the table.
3. Confirm that the destination title is on screen before continuing.

**Result:** The selected allocation, report, configuration, or Distribution Extras
destination is on screen.

Use the destination's controls to understand or process the allocation run.

## Understand an allocation run

| Area or control | What it is for |
|---|---|
| **Re-compute Preview** | Recomputes the preview while the run is in `previewed` state. |
| **Post** | Posts the run while it is in `previewed` state. |
| **Cancel / Reverse** | Cancels or reverses the run while it is in `posted` state. |
| **Lines** | Opens the allocation lines. |
| **Journal Entry** | Opens the generated journal entry when one exists. |
| **Cascade steps** | Shows the cascade-step count when the method is `step_down`. |
| **Cascade step** | Appears in the lines when the method is `step_down`. |
| **GL Account** | Appears in the lines when the presentation is `fanout`. |
| **Over-threshold approval** | Appears when the variance status is `blocked`. |
| **Reversal** | Appears when the run is `cancelled`. |

Before selecting **Post**, note the confirmation text:
`Posting will create the journal entry and lock the run. Continue?`

> **Caution:** Posting locks the run after it creates the journal entry.

Before selecting **Cancel / Reverse**, note the confirmation text:
`This will create a reversal journal entry. Continue?`

After identifying the condition, select **Re-compute Preview** or **Post**, or select
**Lines** or **Journal Entry** to review the allocation.

## Run and review an allocation

Use this procedure when you have opened an allocation run and need to recompute its
preview, post it, or review its related records.

**Prerequisites**

- Use the `previewed` state for **Re-compute Preview** or **Post**.
- Use **Journal Entry** only when a generated journal entry exists.
- Use **Lines** when you need to review the allocation lines.

**Steps**

1. Choose one path:

   | If you need to… | Follow this path |
   |---|---|
   | Recompute the preview | Select **Re-compute Preview**. |
   | Post the run | Select **Post**. Read `Posting will create the journal entry and lock the run. Continue?`. |
   | Review the allocation | Select **Lines**, or select **Journal Entry** when the generated journal entry is available. |

**Result:** The selected preview, posting, or review action is complete.

## Handle allocation modes and run states

The allocation mode and run state determine which details and recovery action you use.

| If the run has… | Work with… |
|---|---|
| `step_down` method | **Cascade steps** and **Cascade step** |
| `fanout` presentation | **GL Account** in the allocation lines |
| `blocked` variance status | **Over-threshold approval** |
| `cancelled` state | **Reversal** |
| `posted` state | **Cancel / Reverse** |

Use this procedure when a posted run must be cancelled or reversed.

**Prerequisites**

- The allocation run is in `posted` state.

**Steps**

1. Select **Cancel / Reverse**.
2. Read `This will create a reversal journal entry. Continue?`.
3. Open **Reversal** after the run is in `cancelled` state.

**Result:** The run is cancelled and its reversal information is available.

## When a destination does not render

Use this check when a requested destination opens the theme customizer instead of the
destination title you selected.

| What you see | What to do |
|---|---|
| The URL lands on `/web#action=apps_menu` and the theme customizer is visible | Stop before using **Save** or **Reset To Default** for this task. |

**Result:** You remain on the theme customizer without changing its settings.

## After the allocation

After an allocation action, continue with the related record that the run makes
available.

| After you… | Continue with… |
|---|---|
| Post a run | **Journal Entry** when the generated entry is available. |
| Need to inspect the allocation detail | **Lines**. |
| Reverse a posted run | **Reversal** after the run is `cancelled`. |

**Result:** You have the next review area for the posted, detailed, or reversed run.

<!-- source: recurring-payments-and-statutory-configuration.md -->

# Recurring payments and statutory configuration

## Recurring payments and recurring templates

A recurring template is a reusable settings record for recurrence and journal choices. A recurring
payment is a dated record that applies those settings to a partner, amount, payment type, and date
range.

Configure recurring payment records and recurring templates.

Prepare a reusable recurrence, create the payment record that uses it, or turn an eligible recurring
entry into a payment. Statutory destinations are covered in
[Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting).

| If you need to… | Go to |
| --- | --- |
| Prepare the recurrence settings | [Prepare and confirm a recurring template](#prepare-and-confirm-a-recurring-template) |
| Create the dated recurring record | [Create and complete a recurring payment](#create-and-complete-a-recurring-payment) |
| Work through generated entries | [Review recurring entries and create payments](#review-recurring-entries-and-create-payments) |
| Continue with payment work | [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups) |
| Work with statutory destinations | [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting) |
| Resolve a validation message | [When a recurring payment action fails](#when-a-recurring-payment-action-fails) |

## Before you start

**Prerequisites**

- You have Accounting user or Accounting manager access.
- A recurring template exists in the `done` state before you select it for a recurring payment.
- You have the partner, amount, payment type, journal, start date, end date, recurrence period,
  recurrence interval, and journal-generation choice for the payment.
- You have the name, journal, recurrence period, recurrence interval, journal-generation choice,
  company, and description for a template.

The recurring template starts with a recurrence interval of `1`, journal generation in `draft`,
and the current company. The recurring payment requires a partner, journal, payment type, start
date, end date, template, recurrence interval, and journal-generation value.

These prerequisites lead into the lists where you prepare the template and then create the dated
payment.

## Find a recurring payment or template

Recurring payments and templates are Accounting configuration records. Use the corresponding list
to open an existing record or start a new record.

**Steps**

1. Open the Accounting area.
2. Open the **Recurring Payment** menu.
3. Choose the list that matches your task.

| If you need to… | Choose |
| --- | --- |
| Open or create a payment record | **Recurring Payment** |
| Open or create the reusable settings record | **Recurring Template** |

4. Choose how to continue.

   | If you need to… | Action |
   | --- | --- |
   | Review a saved record | Open an existing row. |
   | Enter a new record | Start a new record. |

**Result:** The selected recurring-payment or recurring-template list is open, ready for you to
open an existing record or begin a new one.

## Understand the recurring payment and template screens

The screen separates template settings, payment details, and the recurring entries area.

### Recurring template fields

| Field | What it controls |
| --- | --- |
| Template name | Identifies the reusable template. |
| Journal choice | Selects the journal used by the recurrence. |
| Recurrence period | Selects the unit used for each recurrence. |
| Recurrence interval | Sets the number of selected periods between entries. |
| Journal-generation choice | Sets how the journal is generated. |
| Company choice | Sets the company for the template. |
| Description text | Stores explanatory text for the template. |
| Status value | Shows whether the template is in `draft` or `done`. |

The template list shows record name, journal, and status columns.

> **Note:** A bank or cash journal is the permitted journal choice for recurring payments and
> their entries.

### Recurring payment fields

| Field | What it controls |
| --- | --- |
| Completed template choice | Selects the template whose recurrence settings apply. |
| Partner choice | Identifies the party connected to the payment. |
| Payment-type choice | Sets the payment direction. |
| Amount value | Sets the amount for each entry. |
| Journal choice | Selects a bank or cash journal. |
| Start-date value | Sets the first date in the range. |
| End-date value | Sets the end of the range. |
| Recurrence period value | Shows the selected template's period. |
| Recurrence interval value | Shows the selected template's interval. |
| Journal-generation value | Shows the selected template's journal-generation choice. |
| Description text | Stores explanatory text for the payment. |
| Status value | Shows whether the payment is in `draft` or `done`. |

The payment list shows record name, partner, journal, and status columns. The payment form also
contains a recurring entries area. Each entry carries a date, amount, journal, currency for users in the
multi-company group, and status. A bank or cash journal is the permitted journal choice in the
payment and entry forms.

Prepare the timing and journal setup before entering the recurring payment details.

## Prepare and confirm a recurring template

Prepare the timing and journal setup before creating the dated payment record.

**Prerequisites**

- You have Accounting user or Accounting manager access.
- You know the journal, recurrence period, recurrence interval, journal-generation choice, and
  company for the template.

**Steps**

1. Open the **Recurring Template** list.
2. Start a new template.
3. Enter the template name.
4. Select the journal.
5. Select the recurrence period.
6. Enter the recurrence interval.
7. Select the journal-generation choice.
8. Select the company.
9. Enter a description.
10. Select **Confirm** while the template is in `draft` state.

The **Confirm** action changes the template to `done`. The **Set To Draft** action is shown after
the template reaches `done`, so use it when you need to return the template to `draft` before
changing its setup.

**Result:** The recurring template is in `done` state and can be selected for a recurring payment.

## Create and complete a recurring payment

Use the prepared template to create dated entries for a partner and amount.

**Prerequisites**

- A recurring template is in `done` state.
- You have the partner, payment type, amount, journal, start date, end date, and recurrence details.

**Steps**

1. Open the **Recurring Payment** list.
2. Start a new payment record.
3. Select the completed recurring template.
4. Select the partner.
5. Select the payment type.

   | If the payment is for… | Select |
   | --- | --- |
   | Money leaving the company | The outbound payment option. |
   | Money entering the company | The inbound payment option. |
6. Enter an amount greater than zero.
7. Select a bank or cash journal.
8. Enter the start date.
9. Enter the end date.
10. Review the recurrence period, recurrence interval, and journal-generation choice inherited from
    the template.
11. Select **Done** while the payment is in `draft` state.

The **Done** action then sets the recurring payment to `done`.

After the payment reaches `done`, **Set To Draft** is shown. Returning it to `draft` removes its
unfinished entries unless one of its entries is already `done`.

**Result:** The recurring payment is in `done` state and its recurring entries area is available.

## Review recurring entries and create payments

A recurring entry is one dated amount generated from a recurring payment. Use the entry action
when the entry is eligible for payment creation.

**Prerequisites**

- The recurring payment has generated entries.
- The entry you are working on is not in `done` state.

**Steps**

1. Open the **Recurring Payment** record.
2. Open the recurring entries area.
3. Review the entry date, amount, journal, currency when shown, and status.
4. Select **Create Payment** on an entry whose status is not `done`.

**Result:** The entry action has been selected for the eligible recurring entry.

If an action produces one of the listed messages, follow the matching correction below.

## When a recurring payment action fails

Use the message on screen to correct the value or choose an action that matches the record's
status.

| Message | Meaning | What to do |
| --- | --- | --- |
| `Amount Must Be Non-Zero Positive Number` | The amount is zero or negative. | Enter an amount greater than zero. |
| `You cannot Set to Draft as one of the line is already in done state` | At least one recurring entry is already complete. | Keep the recurring payment complete instead of returning it to `draft`. |
| `Cannot delete done records !` | The recurring payment is complete. | Keep the completed record, or use an unfinished record for correction. |

## Know what is next

For payment work, continue in [Payments and follow-ups](doc:payments-and-follow-ups).
For statutory destinations, continue in [Electronic invoicing and local reporting](doc:electronic-invoicing-and-local-reporting).

**Result:** You know whether to continue with payment work or move to the electronic-invoicing
reference page for statutory destinations.